Yaskawa V1000 Series

YASKAWA AC Drive-V1000
Compact Vector Control Drive

Quick Start Guide
Type: CIMR-VU
Models: 200 V Class, Three-Phase Input: 0.1 to 18.5 kW
200 V Class, Single-Phase Input: 0.1 to 3.7 kW
400 V Class, Three-Phase Input: 0.2 to 18.5 kW
To properly use the product, read this manual thoroughly and retain
for easy reference, inspection, and maintenance. Ensure the end
user receives this manual.
Contém manual suplementar em Português.
Receiving 1
Mechanical Installation 2
Electrical Installation 3
Start-Up Programming &
Operation 4
Troubleshooting 5
Specifications A
Parameter List B
MANUAL NO. TOEP C710606 47B

Standards Compliance C
Copyright © 2012 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system,
or transmitted, in any form or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording,
or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Yaskawa. No patent liability is assumed
with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because Yaskawa is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this
manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation
of this manual. Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any
liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this
publication.
Table of Contents
i. PREFACE & GENERAL SAFETY ........................9
i.1 Preface .................................................................. 10
Applicable Documentation ..........................................10
Symbols..................................................................10
Terms and Abbreviations............................................11
i.2 General Safety ....................................................... 12
Supplemental Safety Information..................................12
Safety Messages ......................................................13
Drive Label Warnings ................................................17
i.3 Application Precautions ........................................ 18
General Application Precautions ..................................18
Installation Environment .............................................19
Settings ..................................................................20
General Handling......................................................20
Notes on Motor Operation...........................................22
1. RECEIVING .........................................................27
1.1 Model Number and Nameplate Check.................... 28
Nameplate...............................................................28
1.2 Component Names ................................................ 31
IP20/Open-Chassis ...................................................31
IP00/Open-Chassis ...................................................33
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TOEP C710606 47B YASKAWA AC Drive – V1000 Quick Start Guide 3
Table of Contents
IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure ............................................... 34

Front Views ....................................................................... 37
2. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION .................................. 39

2.1 Mechanical Installation .................................................... 40
Installation Environment ....................................................... 40
Installation Orientation and Spacing........................................ 41
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ......................................... 43
3. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION.................................... 51
3.1 Standard Connection Diagram......................................... 52
3.2 Terminal Block Configuration.......................................... 55
3.3 Protective Covers ............................................................ 56
IP20/Open-Chassis Front and Bottom Cover Removal and
Installation ....................................................................... 56
IP20/NEMA Type 1 Front and Bottom Cover Removal and
Installation ....................................................................... 57
IP20/NEMA Type 1 Top Cover Removal and Installation ............. 59
3.4 Main Circuit Wiring .......................................................... 61
Main Circuit Terminal Functions ............................................. 61
Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques ..................................... 61
Main Circuit Terminal Power Supply and Motor Wiring................ 66
3.5 Control Circuit Wiring ...................................................... 68
Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions.................................. 68
Terminal Configuration......................................................... 70
Wiring Procedure ................................................................ 72
3.6 I/O Connections ............................................................... 74
Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch............................................... 74
3.7 Main Frequency Reference .............................................. 77
DIP Switch S1 Analog Input Signal Selection ............................ 77
3.8 Wiring Checklist .............................................................. 79
4. START-UP PROGRAMMING & OPERATION ............ 81

4.1 Using the Digital LED Operator........................................ 82
4 YASKAWA ELECTRIC TOEP C710606 47B YASKAWA AC Drive – V1000 Quick Start Guide
Table of Contents
Keys, Displays, and LEDs..................................................... 82

LED Screen Displays........................................................... 84
LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications .................................... 85
Menu Structure for Digital LED Operator.................................. 86
4.2 The Drive and Programming Modes ................................ 87
Changing Parameter Settings or Values .................................. 87
Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE................................ 88
Parameters Available in the Setup Group................................. 89
4.3 Start-up Flowcharts ......................................................... 90
Flowchart A: Basic Start-up and Motor Tuning .......................... 91
Subchart A1: Simple Motor Setup with Energy Savings or Speed
Search Using V/f Mode ....................................................... 92
Subchart A2: High Performance Operation Using Open Loop
Vector Motor Control .......................................................... 93
Subchart A3: Operation with Permanent Magnet Motors ............. 94
4.4 Powering Up the Drive ..................................................... 95
Powering Up the Drive and Operation Status Display ................. 95
4.5 Application Selection....................................................... 96
Setting 1: Water Supply Pump Application ............................... 96
Setting 2: Conveyor Application ............................................. 97
Setting 3: Exhaust Fan Application ......................................... 98
Setting 4: HVAC Fan Application............................................ 99
Setting 5: Compressor Application.......................................... 99
Setting 6: Preset 6 ............................................................ 100
Notes on Controlling the Brake when Using Application Preset 6 101
Setting 7: Preset 7 ............................................................ 103
Setting 8: Conveyor Application 2......................................... 104
4.6 Basic Drive Setup Adjustments ......................................106
Control Mode Selection: A1-02 ............................................ 106
Initialize Parameter Values: A1-03........................................ 106
Frequency Reference Source: b1-01..................................... 107
Run Command Input Selection: b1-02 ................................... 109
Drive Duty Selection and Carrier Frequency Selection: C6-01
and C6-02...................................................................... 111
Drive Input Voltage Setting: E1-01........................................ 112
4.7 Auto-Tuning....................................................................113
Types of Auto-Tuning ........................................................ 113
Table of Contents
Before Auto-Tuning the Drive .............................................. 113

Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes .............................. 115
Performing Auto-Tuning ..................................................... 115
Auto-Tuning Example ........................................................ 117
Input Data for Auto-Tuning.................................................. 119
4.8 No-Load Operation Test Run ..........................................123
No-Load Operation Test Run............................................... 123
4.9 Test Run with Load Connected.......................................125
Test Run with the Load Connected ....................................... 125
4.10 Test Run Checklist .........................................................126
5. TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................... 129

5.1 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors.....................................130
Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors ...................................... 130
5.2 Fault Detection ...............................................................131
Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions ...................... 131
5.3 Alarm Detection ..............................................................152
Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions ........................ 152
5.4 Operator Programming Errors ........................................155
oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions .......................... 155
5.5 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection...........................................156
Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions ............... 156
5.6 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults....................................159
Fault Reset Methods ......................................................... 159
A. SPECIFICATIONS...................................................... 161
A.1 Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings.............................162
A.2 Single/Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives ..........................163
A.3 Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives .....................................166
A.4 Drive Specifications........................................................168
B. PARAMETER LIST .................................................... 173

B.1 Parameter Table..............................................................174
Table of Contents
C. STANDARDS COMPLIANCE .................................... 209

C.1 European Standards .......................................................210
CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance .................................. 210
EMC Guidelines Compliance............................................... 214
C.2 UL and CSA Standards ...................................................221
UL Standards Compliance .................................................. 221
CSA Standards Compliance................................................ 229
Drive Motor Overload Protection .......................................... 229
C.3 Safe Disable Input Precautions.......................................232
Safe Disable Function Description ........................................ 232
Installation ...................................................................... 232
C.4 V1000 - ORIENTAÇÃO BÁSICA ......................................234
INVERSORES - V1000 TERMO DE GARANTIA ..................... 234
INVERSORES DE FREQUÊNCIA - V1000............................. 234
Table of Contents
This Page Intentionally Blank
i
Preface & General
Safety
This section provides safety messages pertinent to this product
that, if not heeded, may result in fatality, personal injury, or
equipment damage. Yaskawa is not responsible for the
consequences of ignoring these instructions.
i.1 PREFACE.........................................................10
i.2 GENERAL SAFETY...........................................12
i.3 APPLICATION PRECAUTIONS..........................18
i.1 Preface
i.1 Preface
Yaskawa manufactures products used as components in a wide variety of industrial systems
and equipment. The selection and application of Yaskawa products remain the responsibility
of the equipment manufacturer or end user. Yaskawa accepts no responsibility for the way its
products are incorporated into the final system design. Under no circumstances should any
Yaskawa product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety
control. Without exception, all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and
fail safely under all circumstances. All systems or equipment designed to incorporate a product
manufactured by Yaskawa must be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and
instructions as to the safe use and operation of that part. Any warnings provided by Yaskawa
must be promptly provided to the end user. Yaskawa offers an express warranty only as to the
quality of its products in conforming to standards and specifications published in the Yaskawa
manual. NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IS OFFERED. Yaskawa
assumes no liability for any personal injury, property damage, losses, or claims arising from
misapplication of its products.
u Applicable Documentation
The following manuals are available for V1000 series drives:
V1000 Series AC Drive Quick Start Guide
Read this manual first. This guide is packaged together with the product. It
contains basic information required to install and wire the drive. This guide
provides basic programming and simple setup and adjustment. Refer to the
V1000 Technical Manual for complete descriptions of drive features and
functions.
V1000 Series AC Drive Technical Manual
This manual describes installation, wiring, operation procedures, functions,
troubleshooting, maintenance, and inspections to perform before operation.
u Symbols
Note: Indicates a supplement or precaution that does not cause drive damage.
TERMS
Indicates a term or definition used in this manual.
i.1 Preface
u Terms and Abbreviations

TERMS • Drive: Yaskawa V1000 Series Drive
• PM motor: Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor (an abbreviation for
IPM motor or SPM motor)
• IPM motor: Interior Permanent Magnet Motor (e.g., Yaskawa SSR1 Series
motor)
• SPM motor: Surface Mounted Permanent Magnet Motor (e.g., Yaskawa
SMRA Series SPM motor)
• PG: Pulse Generator
• r/min: Revolutions per Minute
• V/f: V/f Control
• OLV: Open Loop Vector Control
• OLV/PM: Open Loop Vector Control for PM
i.2 General Safety
i.2 General Safety
u Supplemental Safety Information

General Precautions
• The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details. Restore
covers or shields before operating the drive and run the drive according to the instructions described
in this manual.
• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and
may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable.
• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual
may be changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.
• When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa representative
or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on the front cover.
• If nameplate becomes worn or damaged, order a replacement from your Yaskawa representative or
the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
WARNING
Read and understand this manual before installing, operating or servicing this drive. The
drive must be installed according to this manual and local codes.
The following conventions are used to indicate safety messages in this manual. Failure to
heed these messages could result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to the
products or to related equipment and systems.
DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING! will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety
message.
i.2 General Safety
CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
CAUTION! will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety
message.
NOTICE
Indicates a property damage message.
NOTICE: will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety
message.
u Safety Messages
DANGER
Heed the safety messages in this manual.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from
failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains
charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish
when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least five
minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe
level.
i.2 General Safety
WARNING
Sudden Movement Hazard
System may start unexpectedly upon application of power, resulting in death or serious
injury.
Clear all personnel from the drive, motor and machine area before applying power. Secure
covers, couplings, shaft keys and machine loads before applying power to the drive.
When using DriveWorksEZ to create custom programming, the drive I/O terminal
functions change from factory settings and the drive will not perform as outlined in
this manual.
Unpredictable equipment operation may result in death or serious injury.
Take special note of custom I/O programming in the drive before attempting to operate
equipment.
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not attempt to modify or alter the drive in any way not explained in this manual.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Yaskawa is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This
product must not be modified.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use equipment.
Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized
personnel familiar with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Fire Hazard
Do not use an improper voltage source.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply
before applying power.
i.2 General Safety
WARNING
Crush Hazard
Do not use this drive in lifting applications without installing external safety circuitry
to prevent accidental dropping of the load.
The drive does not possess built-in load drop protection for lifting applications.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from falling loads.
Install electrical and/or mechanical safety circuit mechanisms independent of drive circuitry.
CAUTION
Crush Hazard
Do not carry the drive by the front cover.
Failure to comply may result in minor or moderate injury from the main body of the drive
falling.
NOTICE
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and
circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting
voltage.
Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the drive.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the sensitive devices within the drive.
Do not operate damaged equipment.
Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment.
Do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts.
Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable codes.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.
The drive is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 31,000 RMS
symmetrical Amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V Class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V
Class).
i.2 General Safety
NOTICE
Do not expose the drive to halogen group disinfectants.
Failure to comply may cause damage to the electrical components in the drive.
Do not pack the drive in wooden materials that have been fumigated or sterilized.
Do not sterilize the entire package after the product is packed.
i.2 General Safety
u Drive Label Warnings

Always heed the warning information listed in Figure i.1 in the position shown in Figure i.
2.
WARNING Risk of electric shock.

Read manual before installing.
Wait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge after
disconnecting power supply.
To conform to requirements, make sure
to ground the supply neutral for 400V class.
Figure i.1 Warning Information
Warning
Label
Figure i.2 Warning Information Position
i.3 Application Precautions
u General Application Precautions
n Selecting a Reactor
An AC reactor or DC link choke can be used for the following:
• to suppress harmonic current.
• to smooth peak current that results from capacitor switching.
• when the power supply is above 600 kVA.
• when the drive is running from a power supply system with thyristor converters.
Note: A DC link choke is built in to 200 V and 400 V class models with a capacity of 22 kW and higher (HD
rating).
4000 Power supply harmonics

reactor required
Power Supply
Capacity (kVA)
600
Reactor
unnecessary
0
60 400
Drive Capacity (kVA)
Figure i.3 Installing a Reactor
n Drive Capacity
Make sure that the motor rated current is less than the rated nameplate output current of the
drive. When running more than one motor in parallel from a single drive, the drive rated current
should 1.1 times larger than the total motor rated current for all connected motors or nuisance
drive faults may occur.
n Starting Torque
The overload rating of the drive determines the starting and accelerating characteristics of the
motor. Expect lower running torque than when running the motor from line power. To get
more starting torque, use a larger drive or increase both the motor and drive capacity.
n Emergency/Fast Stop
During a drive fault condition, a protective circuit is activated and drive output is shut off.
The motor may coast to a stop or attempt to decelerate depending on parameter settings. If
the emergency/fast stop cannot stop the load as fast as desired, a customer-supplied
mechanical brake may be required. Test emergency stop circuitry before putting drive into
operation.
n Options
The B1, B2, +1, +2, and +3 terminals are used to connect optional power devices. Connect
only devices compatible with the drive.
n Repetitive Starting/Stopping
Applications with frequent starts and stops often exceed 150% of their rated current values.
Heat stress generated from repetitive high current can shorten the life span of the IGBTs. The
expected lifetime for the IGBTs is about 8 million start and stop cycles with a 4 kHz carrier
frequency and a 150% peak current.
Yaskawa recommends lowering the carrier frequency, particularly when audible noise is not
a concern. The user can also choose to reduce the load, increase the acceleration and
deceleration times, or switch to a larger drive. This will help keep peak current levels under
150%. Be sure to check the peak current levels when starting and stopping repeatedly during
the initial test run, and make adjustments accordingly.
u Installation Environment
n Enclosure Panels
Keep the drive in a clean environment by either selecting an area free of airborne dust, lint,
and oil mist, or install the drive in an enclosure panel. Be sure to leave the required space
between drives to provide for cooling, and that proper measures are taken so that the ambient
temperature remains within allowable limits. Keep flammable materials away from the drive.
If the drive must be used in an area where it is subjected to oil mist and excessive vibration,
protective designs are available. Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent for details.
n Installation Direction
The drive should be installed upright as specified in the manual.
u Settings
n Motor Code
If using OLV/PM designed for permanent magnet motors (A1-02 = 5), make sure that the
proper motor code is set in parameter E5-01 before performing a trial run.
n Upper Limits
The drive is capable of running the motor up to 400 Hz. Due to the danger of accidentally
operating the motor at high speed, be sure to set the upper frequency limit. The default setting
for the maximum output frequency is 60 Hz.
n DC Injection Braking
Motor overheat can result if there is too much current used during DC Injection Braking, or
if the DC Injection Braking time is too long.
n Acceleration/Deceleration Times
Acceleration and deceleration times are affected by how much torque the motor generates,
the load torque, and the inertia moment ((GD2)/4). Set a longer accel/decel time when Stall
Prevention is enabled. The accel/decel times are lengthened for as long as the Stall Prevention
function is operating. For faster acceleration and deceleration, install a braking option or
increase the capacity of the drive.
u General Handling
NOTICE: Wiring Check. Never connect the power supply lines to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, or W/T3. Doing
so will destroy the drive. Be sure to perform a final check of all control wiring and other connections before
applying line power. Make sure there are no short circuits on the control terminals (+V, AC, etc.), as this could
damage the drive.
n Selecting a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or Ground Fault

Circuit Interrupter (GFCI)
Yaskawa recommends installing a GFCI on the line power supply to protect drive wiring and
prevent damage in the event of component failure. An MCCB may also be used if permitted
by the power system.
The GFCI should be designed for use with an AC drive (i.e., protected against harmonics)
MCCB selection depends on the power factor for the drive, determined by the power supply
voltage, output frequency, and load.
Refer to the Peripheral Devices & Options chapter of the Technical Manual for more
information on breaker installation. Note that a larger capacity breaker is needed when using
a fully electromagnetic MCCB, as operation characteristics vary with harmonic current.
n Magnetic Contactor (MC) Installation

Use an MC to ensure that line power to the drive can be completely shut off when necessary.
The MC should be wired so that it opens when the drive fault output is triggered.
Avoid switching the MC on the power supply side more frequently than once every 30 minutes.
Frequent switching can cause damage to the drive.
n Inspection and Maintenance

DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to
comply will result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all power to the drive, wait at least five minutes after
all indicators are OFF, measure the DC bus voltage to confirm safe level, and check for unsafe voltages before
servicing to prevent electrical shock. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is
turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc.
CAUTION! Burn Hazard. Do not touch a hot drive heatsink. Failure to comply could result in minor or moderate
injury. Shut off the power to the drive when replacing the cooling fan. To prevent burns, wait at least 15 minutes
and make sure the heatsink has cooled to a safe level.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Wait for at least the time specified on the drive warning label after
opening the load switch on the output side before any inspection or maintenance of permanent magnet (PM)
motors. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Install a switch disconnect between the motor and the drive in
applications where the machine can still rotate even though the drive has fully stopped. Unpredictable
equipment operation may result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not attempt to move a load that could potentially rotate the motor
faster than the maximum allowable r/min when the drive has been shut off. Unpredictable equipment operation
may result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE: Do not open and close the motor disconnect switch while the motor is running, as this may damage
the drive.
NOTICE: If the motor is coasting, make sure the power to the drive is turned on and the drive output has
completely stopped before closing the load switch.
n Wiring
All wire ends should use ring terminals for UL/cUL compliance. Use only the tools
recommended by the terminal manufacturer for crimping.
n Transporting the Drive

NOTICE: Prevent the drive from contact with salts, fluorine, bromine, phthalate ester, and other such harmful
chemicals. Never steam clean the drive. Failure to comply may cause damage to the drive components.
u Notes on Motor Operation
n Using a Standard Motor

Low Speed Range
The cooling fan of a standard motor is usually designed to sufficiently cool the motor at the
rated speed. As the self-cooling capability of such a motor reduces with the speed, applying
full torque at low speed will possibly damage the motor. To prevent motor damage from
overheat, reduce the load torque as the motor slows. Figure i.4 shows the allowable load
characteristics for a Yaskawa standard motor. A motor designed specifically for operation
with a drive should be used when 100% continuous torque is needed at low speeds.
25% ED (or 15 min)
40% ED (or 20 min)
60% ED (or 40 min)
100
90
80
70
Torque 60
(%) 50
Continuous operation
3 6 20 60
Frequency (Hz)
Figure i.4 Allowable Load Characteristics for a Yaskawa Motor
Insulation Tolerance
Consider motor voltage tolerance levels and motor insulation in applications with an input
voltage of over 440 V or particularly long wiring distances. Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa
agent for consultation.
High Speed Operation
Problems may occur with the motor bearings and dynamic balance of the machine when
operating a motor beyond its rated speed. Contact the motor or machine manufacturer.
Torque Characteristics
Torque characteristics differ compared to operating the motor directly from line power. The
user should have a full understanding of the load torque characteristics for the application.
Vibration and Shock
The drive settings allow the user to choose between high carrier PWM control and low carrier
PWM. Selecting high carrier PWM can help reduce motor oscillation.
Take particular caution when using a variable speed drive for an application that is
conventionally run from line power at a constant speed. If mechanical resonance occurs, install
shock-absorbing rubber around the base of the motor and enable the Jump frequency selection
parameter to prevent continuous operation in the resonant frequency range.
Audible Noise
Noise created during run varies by the carrier frequency setting. When using a high carrier
frequency, audible noise from the motor is comparable to the motor noise generated when
running from line power. Operating above the rated r/min, however, can create unpleasant
motor noise.
n Using a Synchronous Motor

• Synchronous motors cannot be started directly from line power. Applications requiring line
power to start should use an induction motor with the drive.
• A single drive is not capable of running multiple synchronous motors at the same time. Use
a standard induction motor for such setups.
• At start, a synchronous motor may rotate slightly in the opposite direction of the Run
command depending on parameter settings and motor type.
• The amount of starting torque that can be generated differs by each control mode and by
the type of motor being used. Set up the motor with the drive after verifying the starting
torque, allowable load characteristics, impact load tolerance, and speed control range.
Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent if you plan to use a motor that does not fall within
these specifications.
• Braking Torque: In Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors, braking torque is less than
125% when running between 20% to 100% speed, even with a braking resistor. Braking
torque drops to less than half when running at less than 20% speed.
• Load Inertia: In Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors, the allowable load inertia
moment is approximately 50 times higher than the motor inertia moment or less. Contact
Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent concerning applications with a larger inertia moment.
• Holding Brake: When using a holding brake in Open Loop Vector Control for PM motors,
release the brake prior to starting the motor. Failure to set the proper timing can result in
speed loss. Not for use with conveyor, transport, or hoist type applications.
• Restarting a Coasting Motor: To restart a coasting motor rotating at over 200 Hz while in
the V/f control mode, use the Short Circuit Braking function to first bring the motor to a
stop. Short Circuit Braking requires a special braking resistor. Contact Yaskawa or your
Yaskawa agent for details.
Speed Search can be used to restart a coasting motor rotating slower than 200 Hz. If the
motor cable is relatively long, however, the motor should instead be stopped using Short
Circuit Braking, which forces the motor to stop by creating a short-circuit in the motor
windings.
n Applications with Specialized Motors

Multi-Pole Motor
Because the rated current will differ from a standard motor, be sure to check the maximum
current when selecting a drive. Always stop the motor before switching between the number
of motor poles. If a regen overvoltage (oV) fault occurs or if overcurrent protection (oC) is
triggered, the motor will coast to stop.
Submersible Motor
Because motor rated current is greater than a standard motor, select the drive capacity
accordingly. Be sure to use a large enough gauge motor cable to avoid decreasing the
maximum torque level on account of voltage drop caused by a long motor cable.
Explosion-Proof Motor
Both the motor and drive need to be tested together to be certified as explosion-proof. The
drive is not designed for explosion proof areas.
Furthermore, if an encoder is attached to an explosion-proof motor make sure the encoder is
also explosion-proof. Use an insulating signal converter for connecting the encoder signal
lines to the drives speed feedback option card.
Geared Motor
To avoid gear damage when operating at low speeds or very high speeds, make sure that both
the gear and lubricant are rated for the desired speed range. Consult with the manufacturer for
applications that require operation outside the rated speed range of the motor or gear box.
Single-Phase Motor
Variable speed AC drives are not designed for operation with single phase motors. Using
capacitors to start the motor causes excessive current to flow and can damage drive
components. A split-phase start or a repulsion start can end up burning out the starter coils
because the internal centrifugal switch is not activated. The drive is for use with 3-phase
motors only.
Motor with Brake
Caution should be taken when using a drive to operate a motor with a built-in holding brake.
If the brake is connected to the output side of the drive, it may not release at start due to low
voltage levels. A separate power supply should be installed for the motor brake. Motors with
a built-in brake tend to generate a fair amount of noise when running at low speeds.
n Power Driven Machinery (decelerators, belts, chains, etc.)

Continuous operation at low speeds wears on the lubricating material used in gear box type
systems to accelerate and decelerate power driven machinery. Caution should also be taken
when operating at speeds above the rated machine speed due to noise and shortened
performance life.
1
Receiving
This chapter describes the proper inspections to perform after
receiving the drive and illustrates the different enclosure types
and components.
1.1 MODEL NUMBER AND NAMEPLATE CHECK. . .28

1.2 COMPONENT NAMES.......................................31
1.1 Model Number and Nameplate Check

Please perform the following tasks after receiving the drive:
• Inspect the drive for damage.
If the drive appears damaged upon receipt, contact the shipper immediately.
• Verify receipt of the correct model by checking the information on the nameplate.
• If you have received the wrong model or the drive does not function properly, contact your
supplier.
u Nameplate
A
J MODEL :
MAX APPLI. MOTOR : 0.75kW / 0.4kW REV : A
I INPUT : AC3PH 200-240V 50 / 60Hz 2.7A / 1.4A
IND.CONT.EQ.
H OUTPUT : AC3PH 0-240V 0-400Hz 1.2A / 0.8A 7J48
MASS : 0.6 kg B
G O/N :
F S/N : C
FILE NO : E131457 IP20

PASS
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN
E 2-1 Kurosaki-shiroishi, Yahatanishi-Ku, Kitakyushu 806-0004 Japan
A – Normal Duty Amps / F – Serial number

Heavy Duty Amps G – Lot number
B – Software version H – Output specifications
C – CE and TÜV Certification I – Input specifications
D – Enclosure type J – AC drive model
E – Address <1>
Figure 1.1 Nameplate Information Example
<1> The address of the head office of Yaskawa Electric Corporation (responsible for product
liability) is shown on the nameplate.
CIMR - V U 2 A 0001 F A A
Drive V1000 Design
Series Revision
Order
No. Region Customized
No. No. Enclosure Type
Code Specifications
U USA A Standard model A IP00/Open-Chassis
B IP20/Open-Chassis
No. Voltage Class F IP20/NEMA Type 1 Environmental

No.
B 1-phase, 200-240 Vac Specification <3>
G NEMA 4X/IP66 <1> A Standard
2 3-phase, 200-240 Vac
Humidity- and
J IP20/Finless <2> M
4 3-phase, 380-480 Vac dust-resistant
S Vibration-resistant
L IP00/Finless <2>
Refer to the tables below.
<1> Refer to manual TOBPC71060635 for more information on these models.

<2> Refer to manual TOBPC71060621 for more information on these models.
<3> Drives with these specifications do not guarantee complete protection for the specified environmental condition.
Receiving
n Single-Phase 200 V
Normal Duty Heavy Duty
Max. Motor Rated Output Max. Motor Rated Output
No. No.
Capacity kW Current A Capacity kW Current A
0001 0.2 1.2 0001 0.1 0.8 1
0002 0.4 1.9 0002 0.2 1.6
0003 0.75 3.3 0003 0.4 3.0
0006 1.1 6.0 0006 0.75 5.0
0010 2.2 9.6 0010 1.5 8.0
0012 3.0 12.0 0012 2.2 11.0
– – – 0018 3.7 17.5
Note: Model BA0018 is available with a Heavy Duty rating only.
n Three-Phase 200 V
Max Motor Rated Output Max Motor Rated Output
No. No.
0001 0.2 1.2 0001 0.1 0.8
0002 0.4 1.9 0002 0.2 1.6
0004 0.75 3.5 0004 0.4 3.0
0006 1.1 6.0 0006 0.75 5.0
0010 2.2 9.6 0010 1.5 8.0
0012 3.0 12.0 0012 2.2 11.0
0020 5.5 19.6 0020 3.7 17.5
0030 7.5 30.0 0030 5.5 25.0
0040 11 40.0 0040 7.5 33.0
0056 15 56.0 0056 11 47.0
0069 18.5 69.0 0069 15 60.0
n Three-Phase 400 V
Max. Motor Rated Output Max. Motor Rated Output
No. No.
0001 0.4 1.2 0001 0.2 1.2
0002 0.75 2.1 0002 0.4 1.8
0004 1.5 4.1 0004 0.75 3.4
0005 2.2 5.4 0005 1.5 4.8
0007 3.0 6.9 0007 2.2 5.5
0009 3.7 8.8 0009 3.0 7.2
0011 5.5 11.1 0011 3.7 9.2
0018 7.5 17.5 0018 5.5 14.8
0023 11 23.0 0023 7.5 18.0
0031 15 31.0 0031 11 24.0
0038 18.5 38.0 0038 15 31.0
1.2 Component Names
1.2 Component Names

This section illustrates the drive components as they are mentioned in this manual.
u IP20/Open-Chassis
n Single-Phase AC 200 V BA0001B to BA0003B

Three-Phase AC 200 V 2A0001B to 2A0006B
A
L
B
K
J
C
H I
Receiving
D
E
G
F 1
A – Fan cover <1> G – Front cover screw
B – Mounting hole H – Front cover
C – Heatsink I – Comm port
D – Optional 24 VDC power J – LED operator Refer to
supply connector cover Using the Digital LED
E – Terminal board Refer to Operator on page 82
Control Circuit Terminal K – Case
Block Functions on page L – Cooling fan <1>
68
F – Terminal cover
Figure 1.2 Exploded View of IP20/Open-Chassis Type Components
(Model 2A0006B)
<1> Models BA0001B to BA0003B and 2A0001B to 2A0004B do not have a cooling fan or a
cooling fan cover.
1.2 Component Names
n Single-Phase AC 200 V BA0006B to BA0018B

B
L
K
C
J
I
H
D
E
F
G
A – Fan cover <1> H – Front cover
B – Mounting hole I – Terminal cover
C – Heatsink J – Bottom cover
D – Optional 24 VDC power K – LED operator Refer to
E – Comm port Operator on page 82
F – Terminal board Refer to L – Case
Control Circuit Terminal M – Cooling fan <1>
Block Functions on page
68
G – Front cover screw
(Model 2A0012B)
<1> Models BA0006B and 4A0001B to 4A0004B do not have a cooling fan or a cooling fan cover.
Model BA0018B has two cooling fans.
1.2 Component Names
u IP00/Open-Chassis
n Three-Phase AC 200 V 2A0030A to 2A0069A

Three-Phase AC 400 V 4A0018A to 4A0038A
A
M
C
L
D
J K
Receiving
I E
1
H
F
G
A –
Fan cover H – Front cover screw
B –
Cooling Fan I – Front cover
C –
Mounting hole J – Terminal cover
D –
Heatsink K – Comm port
E –
Optional 24 VDC power L – LED operator Refer to
F – Terminal board Refer to Operator on page 82
Control Circuit Terminal M – Case
Block Functions on page
68
G – Bottom cover
(Model 4A0018A)
1.2 Component Names
u IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure
n Single-Phase AC 200 V BA0001F to BA0003F

Three-Phase AC 200 V 2A0001F to 2A0006F
A
O
N B
M
L
C
K
J
D
E
F
I G
A – Fan cover <1> I – Front cover screws

B – Mounting hole J – Front cover
C – Heatsink K – Comm port
D – Optional 24 VDC power L – LED operator Refer to
E – Terminal board Refer to Operator on page 82
Control Circuit Terminal M – Case
Block Functions on page N – Top cover
68 O – Cooling fan <1>
F – Bottom cover screws
G – Rubber bushing
H – Bottom front cover
Figure 1.5 Exploded View of IP20/NEMA Type 1 Components
(Model 2A0006F)
<1> Models BA0001F to BA0003F and 2A0001F to 2A0004F do not have a cooling fan or a cooling
fan cover.
1.2 Component Names
n Single-Phase AC 200 V BA0006F to BA0018F

A
P
N O B
M
L C
K
J
D
E
F
I G
H
Receiving
A – Fan cover <1> I – Front cover screws
B – Mounting hole J – Front cover
C – Heatsink K – Terminal cover
D – Optional 24 VDC power L – Comm port
supply connector cover
E – Terminal board Refer to
M – LED operator Refer to
Using the Digital LED 1
Control Circuit Terminal Operator on page 82
Block Functions on page N – Case
68 O – Top cover
F – Cover screws P – Cooling fan <1>
G – Rubber bushing
H – Bottom cover
Figure 1.6 Exploded view of IP20/NEMA Type 1 Components
(Model 2A0012F)
<1> Models BA0006B and 4A0001B to 4A0004B do not have a cooling fan or a cooling fan cover.
Model BA0018B has two cooling fans.
1.2 Component Names
n Three-Phase AC 200 V 2A0030F to 2A0069F

B
P
O
N C
M
D
L
E
K
J
G
I
H
A –
Fan cover I – Front cover screws
B –
Cooling fan J – Terminal cover
C –
Mounting Hole K – Terminal board Refer to
D –
Case and Heatsink Control Circuit Terminal
E –
Optional 24 VDC power Block Functions on page
supply connection cover 68
F – Cover screws L – Front cover
G – Rubber bushing M – Comm port
H – Bottom cover N – LED operator Refer to
Using the Digital LED
Operator on page 82
O – Case
P – Top cover
Figure 1.7 Exploded View of IP20/NEMA Type 1 Components
(Model 4A0018F)
1.2 Component Names
u Front Views
2A0006B 2A0012B
A
I
I A B
H
H B
C
C
D D
G G
E
E
F
F
Receiving
A – Terminal board F – Ground terminal
connector G – Terminal cover
B – DIP switch S1 Refer to H – Option card connector
DIP Switch S1 Analog I – DIP switch S2
Input Signal Selection on
page 77
C – DIP switch S3 Refer to 1
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
Switch on page 74
D – Control circuit terminal
Refer to Control Circuit
Wiring on page 68
E – Main circuit terminal
Refer to Wiring the Main
Circuit Terminal on page
67
Figure 1.8 Front Views of Drives
1.2 Component Names
2
Mechanical
Installation
This chapter explains how to properly mount and install the
drive.
2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION..........................40
2.1 Mechanical Installation

This section outlines specifications, procedures, and environment for proper mechanical
installation of the drive.
u Installation Environment
To help prolong the optimum performance life of the drive, install the drive in the proper
environment. Table 2.1 describes the appropriate environment for the drive.
Table 2.1 Installation Environment
Environment Conditions
Installation Area Indoors
IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure: -10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)
IP20/IP00 Open-Chassis enclosure: -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)
Finless Type: IP20/IP00 enclosure: -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)
Ambient NEMA Type 4X/IP66 enclosure: -10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)
Temperature Drive reliability improves in environments without wide temperature fluctuations.
When using an enclosure panel, install a cooling fan or air conditioner in the area to ensure
that the air temperature inside the enclosure does not exceed the specified levels.
Do not allow ice to develop on the drive.
Humidity 95% RH or less and free of condensation
Storage Temperature -20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to +104 °F)
Install the drive in an area free from:
• oil mist and dust
• metal shavings, oil, water or other foreign materials
• radioactive materials
Surrounding Area • combustible materials (e.g., wood)
• harmful gases and liquids
• excessive vibration
• chlorides
• direct sunlight
Up to 1000 meters without derating; up to 3000 meters with output current, ambient
Altitude temperature, and voltage derating.
10 to 20 Hz at 9.8 m/s2
Vibration
20 to 55 Hz at 5.9 m/s2
Orientation Install the drive vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects.
NOTICE: Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings from falling into the drive during
installation and project construction. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Place a temporary
cover over the top of the drive during installation. Remove the temporary cover before startup, as the cover
will reduce ventilation and cause the drive to overheat.
NOTICE: Avoid placing drive peripheral devices, transformers, or other electronics near the drive. Failure to
comply could result in erroneous operation. If such devices must be used in close proximity to the drive, take
proper steps to shield the drive from noise.
u Installation Orientation and Spacing

Install the drive upright as illustrated in Figure 2.1 to maintain proper cooling.
A B B
A – Correct B – Incorrect
Figure 2.1 Correct Installation Orientation
Mechanical Installation
n Single Drive Installation
Figure 2.2 shows the required installation spacing to maintain sufficient space for airflow and
wiring. Install the heatsink against a closed surface to avoid diverting cooling air around the
heatsink.
Side Clearance Top/Bottom Clearance
A A
C
A – 30 mm minimum C – 100 mm minimum

B – Airflow direction
Figure 2.2 Correct Installation Spacing
Note: IP20/NEMA Type 1, IP00/Open-Chassis, and IP20/Open-Chassis models require the same amount of
space above and below the drive for installation.
n Multiple Drive Installation

When installing multiple drives into the same enclosure panel, mount the drives according to
Figure 2.2. When mounting drives with a minimum side-by-side clearance of 2 mm according
to Figure 2.3, derating must be considered and parameter L8-35 must be set. Refer to
Parameter List on page 173.
A B 2 mm B
C
A – Line up the tops of the C – 100 mm minimum

drives. D – Airflow direction
B – 30 mm minimum
Figure 2.3 Space Between Drives (Side-by-Side Mounting)
Note: When installing drives of different heights in the same enclosure panel, the tops of the drives should line
up. Leave space between the top and bottom of stacked drives for cooling fan replacement if required.
Using this method, it is possible to replace the cooling fans later.
NOTICE: When mounting IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure drives side by side, the top covers of all drives must
be removed as shown in Figure 2.4.
Figure 2.4 IP20/NEMA Type 1 Side-by-Side Mounting in Enclosure
u Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

n IP20/Open-Chassis Drives
Table 2.2 IP20/Open-Chassis (without an EMC filter)
W1 2-M4 t1
H1
H
D1
H2
W
D
Dimensions mm (in)
Voltage Wt.
Drive Model
Class W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1 kg
(lb.)
68 128 76 56 118 5 6.5 3 0.6
BA0001B (2.68) (5.04) (2.99) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20) (0.26) (0.12) (1.3)
Single-Phase 68 128 76 56 118 5 6.5 3 0.6
BA0002B
200 V Class (2.68) (5.04) (2.99) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20) (0.26) (0.12) (1.3)
BA0003B 68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
118
(4.65)
56
(2.20)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
38.5
(1.52)
5 1.0
(0.20) (2.2) 2
68 128 76 56 118 5 6.5 3 0.6
2A0001B (2.68) (5.04) (2.99) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20) (0.26) (0.12) (1.3)
68 128 76 56 118 5 6.5 3 0.6
2A0002B
Three-Phase (2.68) (5.04) (2.99) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20) (0.26) (0.12) (1.3)
200 V Class 68 128 108 56 118 5 38.5 5 0.9
2A0004B (2.68) (5.04) (4.25) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20) (1.52) (0.20) (2.0)
68 128 128 56 118 5 58.5 5 1.1
2A0006B (2.68) (5.04) (5.04) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20) (2.30) (0.20) (2.4)

W1 4-M4
H1
H
t1
D1
H2
W
D
Dimensions mm (in)
Voltage Wt.
Drive Model
(lb.)
108 128 137.5 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
BA0006B (4.25) (5.04) (5.41) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (2.28) (0.20) (3.7)
108 128 154 96 118 5 58 5 1.8
BA0010B
Single-Phase (4.25) (5.04) (6.06) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (2.28) (0.20) (4.0)
200 V Class 140 128 163 128 118 5 65 5 2.4
BA0012B (5.51) (5.04) (6.42) (5.04) (4.65) (0.20) (2.56) (0.20) (5.3)
170 128 180 158 118 5 65 5 3.0
BA0018B (6.69) (5.04) (7.09) (6.22) (4.65) (0.20) (2.56) (0.20) (6.6)
108 128 129 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
2A0010B (4.25) (5.04) (5.08) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (2.28) (0.20) (3.7)
Three-Phase 2A0012B 108 128 137.5 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
200 V Class (4.25) (5.04) (5.41) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (2.28) (0.20) (3.7)
140 128 143 128 118 5 65 5 2.4
2A0020B (5.51) (5.04) (5.63) (5.04) (4.65) (0.20) (2.56) (0.20) (5.3)
W1 4-M4
H1
H
t1
D1
H2
W
D
Dimensions mm (in)
Voltage Wt.
Drive Model
(lb.)
108 128 81 96 118 5 10 5 1.0
4A0001B (4.25) (5.04) (3.19) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (0.39) (0.20) (2.2)
108 128 99 96 118 5 28 5 1.2
4A0002B (4.25) (5.04) (3.90) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (1.10) (0.20) (2.6)
108 128 137.5 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
4A0004B (4.25) (5.04) (5.41) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (2.28) (0.20) (3.7)
Three-Phase 108 128 154 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
400 V Class 4A0005B (4.25) (5.04) (6.06) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (2.28) (0.20) (3.7)
108 128 154 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
4A0007B (4.25) (5.04) (6.06) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (2.28) (0.20) (3.7)
108 128 154 96 118 5 58 5 1.7
2
4A0009B (4.25) (5.04) (6.06) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (2.28) (0.20) (3.7)
140 128 143 128 118 5 65 5 2.4
4A0011B (5.51) (5.04) (5.63) (5.04) (4.65) (0.20) (2.56) (0.20) (5.3)
n IP00/Open-Chassis Drives
W1
4-d
H2
H1
H
t1
H4
W D1
D
Dimensions mm (in)
Voltage Drive Wt.
Class Model W H D W1 H1 H2 H4 D1 d t1 kg
(lb)
140 254 140 122 234 248 13 55 5 3.8
2A0030A (5.5) (9.7) (5.5) (4.8) (9.2) (9.8) (0.5) (2.2)
M5
(0.2) (7.9)
140 254 140 122 234 248 13 55 5 3.8
2A0040A (5.5) (9.7) (5.5) (4.8) (9.2) (9.8) (0.5) (2.2)
M5
(0.2) (7.9)
Three-Phase
200 V Class 180 290 163 160 270 284 15 75 5 5.5
2A0056A (7.1) (11.2) (6.4) (6.3) (10.6) (11.2) (0.6) (3.0)
M5
(0.2) (11.7)
220 350 187 192 320 336 15 78 5 9.2
2A0069A (8.7) (13.2) (7.4) (7.6) (12.6) (13.2) (0.6) (3.1)
M6
(0.2) (19.2)
140 254 140 122 234 248 13 55 5 3.8
4A0018A (5.5) (9.7) (5.5) (4.8) (9.2) (9.8) (0.5) (2.2)
M5
(0.2) (7.9)
140 254 140 122 234 248 13 55 5 3.8
4A0023A (5.5) (9.7) (5.5) (4.8) (9.2) (9.8) (0.5) (2.2)
M5
(0.2) (7.9)
Three-Phase
400 V Class 180 290 143 160 270 284 15 55 5 5.2
4A0031A (7.1) (11.2) (5.6) (6.3) (10.6) (11.2) (0.6) (2.2)
M5
(0.2) (11.0)
180 290 163 160 270 284 15 75 5 5.5
4A0038A (7.1) (11.2) (6.4) (6.3) (10.6) (11.2) (0.6) (3.0)
M5
(0.2) (11.7)
n IP20/NEMA Type 1 Drives

Table 2.5 IP20/NEMA Type 1 (without an EMC filter)
W1 2-M4 t1
H6
H2
H1
H
H4
H5
D1
W D
H3
Dimensions mm (in)
Voltage Drive Wt.
Class Model W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 D1 t1 kg
(lb.)
68 149.5 76 56 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 6.5 3 0.8
BA0001F
(2.68) (5.89) (2.99) (2.20) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (0.26) (0.12) (1.8)
Single-
Phase 68 149.5 76 56 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 6.5 3 0.8
BA0002F
200 V (2.68) (5.89) (2.99) (2.20) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (0.26) (0.12) (1.8)
Class
68 149.5 118 56 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 38.5 5 1.2
BA0003F
(2.68) (5.89) (4.65) (2.20) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (1.54) (0.20) (2.6)
2A0001F
68 149.5 76
(2.68) (5.89) (2.99)
56
(2.20)
128 118
(5.03) (4.65)
4 20 5
(0.16) (0.79) (0.20)
1.5
(0.06)
6.5
(0.26)
3
(0.12)
0.8
(1.8) 2
Three- 68 149.5 76 56 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 6.5 3 0.8
2A0002F
Phase (2.68) (5.89) (2.99) (2.20) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (0.26) (0.12) (1.8)
200 V 68 149.5 108 56 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 38.5 5 1.1
Class 2A0004F
(2.68) (5.89) (4.25) (2.20) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (1.54) (0.20) (2.4)
68 149.5 128 56 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 58.5 5 1.3
2A0006F
(2.68) (5.89) (5.04) (2.20) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (2.32) (0.20) (2.9)

W1 4-M4 t1
H6
H2
H1
H
H5
H4
D1
D
H3
Dimensions mm (in)
Voltage Drive Wt.
(lb.)
108 149.5 137.5 96 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 58 5 1.9
BA0006F
(4.25) (5.89) (5.41) (3.78) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (2.28) (0.20) (4.2)
Single- 108 149.5 154 96 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 58 5 2.0

BA0010F
Phase (4.25) (5.89) (6.06) (3.78) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (2.28) (0.20) (4.4)
200 V 140 153 163 128 128 118 4.8 20 5 5 65 5 2.6
Class BA0012F
(5.51) (6.02) (6.42) (5.04) (5.03) (4.65) (0.19) (0.79) (0.20) (0.20) (2.56) (0.20) (5.7)
170 171 180 158 133 118 4.8 38 5 5 65 5 3.3
BA0018F
(6.69) (6.73) (7.08) (6.22) (5.23) (4.64) (0.19) (1.50) (0.20) (0.20) (2.56) (0.20) 7.3
108 149.5 129 96 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 58 5 1.9
2A0010F
(4.25) (5.89) (5.08) (3.78) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (2.28) (0.20) (4.2)
Three-
Phase 108 149.5 137.5 96 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 58 5 1.9
2A0012F
200 V (4.25) (5.89) (5.41) (3.78) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (2.28) (0.20) (4.2)
Class
140 153 143 128 128 118 4.8 20 5 5 65 5 2.6
2A0020F
(5.51) (6.02) (5.63) (5.04) (5.03) (4.65) (0.19) (0.79) (0.20) (0.20) (2.56) (0.20) (5.7)
W1 4-M4 t1
H6
H2
H1
H
H5
H4
D1
D
H3
Dimensions mm (in)
Voltage Drive Wt.
(lb.)
108 149.5 81 96 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 10 5 1.2
4A0001F
(4.25) (5.89) (3.19) (3.78) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (0.39) (0.20) (2.6)
108 149.5 99 96 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 28 5 1.4
4A0002F
(4.25) (5.89) (3.90) (3.78) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (1.10) (0.20) (3.1)
108 149.5 137.5 96 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 58 5 1.9
4A0004F
(4.25) (5.89) (5.41) (3.78) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (2.28) (0.20) (4.2)
Three-
Phase 108 149.5 154 96 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 58 5 1.9
4A0005F
400 V (4.25) (5.89) (6.06) (3.78) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (2.28) (0.20) (4.2)
Class
108 149.5 154 96 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 58 5 1.9
2
4A0007F
(4.25) (5.89) (6.06) (3.78) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (2.28) (0.20) (4.2)
108 149.5 154 96 128 118 4 20 5 1.5 58 5 1.9
4A0009F
(4.25) (5.89) (6.06) (3.78) (5.03) (4.65) (0.16) (0.79) (0.20) (0.06) (2.28) (0.20) (4.2)
140 153 143 128 128 118 4.8 20 5 5 65 5 2.6
4A0011F
(5.51) (6.02) (5.63) (5.04) (5.03) (4.65) (0.19) (0.79) (0.20) (0.20) (2.56) (0.20) (5.7)

W1 4-d
H6
H2
H1
H
t1
H4
H5
W D1
H3
Dimensions mm (in)
Voltage Drive Wt.
Class Model W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 D1 t1 d kg
(lb.)
140 254 140 122 234 248 6 13 13 1.5 55 5 3.8
2A0030F M5
(5.51) (10.00) (5.51) (4.80) (9.21) (9.76) (0.24) (0.51) (0.51) (0.06) (2.17) (0.20) (8.4)
Three- 140 254 140 122 234 248 6 13 13 1.5 55 5 3.8

2A0040F M5
Phase (5.51) (10.00) (5.51) (4.80) (9.21) (9.76) (0.24) (0.51) (0.51) (0.06) (2.17) (0.20) (8.4)
200 V 180 290 163 160 270 284 6 15 13 1.5 75 5 5.5
Class 2A0056F M5
(7.09) (11.42) (6.42) (6.30) (10.63) (11.18) (0.24) (0.59) (0.51) (0.06) (2.95) (0.20) (12.1)
220 350 187 192 320 336 7 15 22 1.5 78 5 9.2

2A0069F M6
(8.66) (13.78) (7.36) (7.56) (12.60) (13.23) (0.28) (0.59) (0.87) (0.06) (3.07) (0.20) (20.3)
140 254 140 122 234 248 6 13 13 1.5 55 5 3.8

4A0018F M5
(5.51) (10.00) (5.51) (4.80) (9.21) (9.76) (0.24) (0.51) (0.51) (0.06) (2.17) (0.20) (8.4)
Three- 140 254 140 122 234 248 6 13 13 1.5 55 5 3.8

4A0023F M5
Phase (5.51) (10.00) (5.51) (4.80) (9.21) (9.76) (0.24) (0.51) (0.51) (0.06) (2.17) (0.20) (8.4)
400 V 180 290 143 160 270 284 6 15 13 1.5 55 5 5.2
Class 4A0031F M5
(7.09) (11.42) (5.63) (6.30) (10.63) (11.18) (0.24) (0.59) (0.51) (0.06) (2.17) (0.20) (11.5)
180 290 163 160 270 284 6 13 13 1.5 75 5 5.5

4A0038F M5
(7.09) (11.42) (6.42) (6.30) (10.63) (11.18) (0.24) (0.51) (0.51) (0.06) (2.95) (0.20) (12.1)
3
Electrical
Installation
This chapter explains proper procedures for wiring the control
circuit terminals, motor and power supply.
3.1 STANDARD CONNECTION DIAGRAM...............52

3.2 TERMINAL BLOCK CONFIGURATION..............55
3.3 PROTECTIVE COVERS.....................................56
3.4 MAIN CIRCUIT WIRING.....................................61
3.5 CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING.............................68
3.6 I/O CONNECTIONS...........................................74
3.7 MAIN FREQUENCY REFERENCE......................77
3.8 WIRING CHECKLIST.........................................79
3.1 Standard Connection Diagram

Connect the drive and peripheral devices as shown in Figure 3.1. It is possible to run the drive
via the digital operator without connecting digital I/O wiring. This section does not discuss
drive operation; Refer to Start-Up Programming & Operation on page 81 for instructions
on operating the drive.
NOTICE: Inadequate branch short circuit protection could result in damage to the drive. Install adequate
branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable codes. The drive is suitable for circuits capable of
delivering not more than 31,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V Class) and 480 Vac
maximum (400 V Class).
NOTICE: When the wiring distance is greater than 100 meters, pay special attention to the motor insulation
voltage or use a drive duty motor. Failure to comply could lead to motor insulation breakdown.
NOTICE: Correctly set Sink/Source jumper S3 for internal power supply. Failure to comply may result in
damage to the drive. Refer to I/O Connections on page 74 for details.
NOTICE: Do not connect AC control circuit ground to drive enclosure. Improper drive grounding can cause
control circuit malfunction.
NOTICE: Route motor leads U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 separate from all other leads to reduce possible
interference related issues. Failure to comply may result in abnormal operation of drive and nearby equipment.
NOTICE: The minimum load for the multi-function relay output MA-MB-MC is 10 mA. If a circuit requires less
than 10 mA (reference value), connect it to a photocoupler output (P1, P2, PC). Improper application of
peripheral devices could result in damage to the photocoupler output of the drive.
Terminals +1, +2, − , B1, and B2 DC link choke <2>

are for connecting options.
Never connect power supply
(option) <1> Thermal relay
Braking resistor
(option) Motor
lines to these terminals.
For single-phase 2 MCCB
<3> Jumper (option)
Cooling fan
r1 FU
200 V power supply r1
use R/L1 and S/L2. +2 +1 - B1 B2 FV
s1 s1 M
Wiring sequence should shut off FW
power to the drive when a fault
1 MCCB MC
t1
V1000 t1
output is triggered.
<8> R/L1 R/L1 U
U/T1
Three phase S/L2 S/L2 Main circuit V
power supply V/T2 M
for 200 V / 400 V T/L3 T/L3 W
Control circuit W/T3
TRX THRX OFF ON

<4>
MC Forward run/stop S1
SA Ground
Braking resistor unit Reverse run/stop S2 10 or less (400 V class)
Thermal relay trip contact THRX Option card 100 or less (200 V class)
External fault S3 connector
1 2
SA Fault reset S4 DIP switch S1 Digital output
TRX Multi-step V I 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
MC 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A
speed 1
main/aux switch S5 (default setting)
MC MB SA
Multi-step
TRX speed 2 S6
MA Fault
Fault relay contact Jog reference S7
Digital inputs +24 V 8 mA MB Digital output
(default setting) 24 V 5 to 48 Vdc
2 to 50 mA
<5> Sink MC (default setting)
DIP
switch S3 Source
SC
P1 During Run
Shield ground 0V (photocoupler 1)
Electrical Installation
terminal
P2 Frequency agree
(photocoupler 2)
Pulse train input
RP
(max. 32 kHz) PC Photocoupler
Setting power supply output common
+V
2k +10.5 max. 20 mA
MP Pulse train output
Main speed
A1 0 to +10 V (20 k ) 0 to 32 kHz <6>
frequency A2 0 to +10 V (20 k ) Analog monitor
AM
reference. (0)4 to 20 mA (250 ) + output
Multi-function AM
AC 0 to +10 Vdc
programmable AC - (2 mA)
Termination Comm.
DIP Monitor
resistor
Safe Disable
Safety switch
HC
switch
S2
120 , 1/2 W
R+
connector output
3
R-
Input Jumper <7> S+
H1 MEMOBUS/
S- Modbus comm.
RS-485/422
IG
Cable shield ground
shielded line twisted-pair shielded line

main circuit terminal control terminal
Figure 3.1 Drive Standard Connection Diagram
<1> Remove the jumper when installing an optional DC link choke.
<2> The MC on the input side of the main circuit should open when the thermal relay is
triggered.
<3> Self-cooled motors do not require separate cooling fan motor wiring.
<4> Connected using sequence input signal (S1 to S7) from NPN transistor; Default: sink
mode (0 V com).
<5> Use only a +24 V internal power supply in sinking mode; the source mode requires
an external power supply. Refer to I/O Connections on page 74 for details.
<6> Monitor outputs work with devices such as analog frequency meters, ammeters,
voltmeters and wattmeters; they are not intended for use as a feedback-type of signal.
<7> Disconnect the wire jumper between HC and H1 when utilizing the safety input. Refer
to Wiring Procedure on page 72 for details on removing the jumper. The wire length
for the Safe Disable input should not exceed 30 m.
<8> Note that if the drive is set to trigger a fault output whenever the fault restart function
is activated (L5-02 = 1), then a sequence to interrupt power when a fault occurs will
result in shutting off the power to the drive as the drive attempts to restart itself. The
default setting for L5-02 is 0 (fault output active during restart attempt).
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not close the wiring for the control circuit unless the multifunction
input terminal parameter is properly set (S5 for 3-Wire; H1-05 = “0”). Improper sequencing of run/stop circuitry
could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the
correct state before energizing the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving
equipment. When programmed for 3-Wire control, a momentary closure on terminal S1 may cause the drive
to start.
WARNING! When 3-Wire sequence is used, set the drive to 3-Wire sequence before wiring the control
terminals and ensure parameter b1-17 is set to 0 (drive does not accept a run command at power up (default).
If the drive is wired for 3-Wire sequence but set up for 2-Wire sequence (default) and if parameter b1-17 is
set to 1 (drive accepts a Run command at power up), the motor will rotate in reverse direction at power up of
the drive and may cause injury.
WARNING! When the application preset function is executed (or A1-06 is set to any value other than 0) the
drive I/O terminal functions change. This may cause unexpected operation and potential damage to
equipment or injury.
Figure 3.2 illustrates an example of a 3-Wire sequence.
Drive
Stop relay (N.C.) Run relay (N.O.)
S1
Run command (run on momentary close)
S2
Stop command (stop on momentary open)
S5 Foward/reverse command
(multi-function input: H1-05 = 0)
SC
Sequence input common
Figure 3.2 3-Wire Sequence
3.2 Terminal Block Configuration
3.2 Terminal Block Configuration

The figures in this section provide illustrations of the main circuit terminal block
configurations of the different drive sizes.
Models: CIMR-VBA0001, 0002, 0003 Models: CIMR-VBA0006, 0010, 0012

CIMR-V2A0001, 0002, 0004, 0006 CIMR-V2A0010, 0012, 0020
CIMR-V4A0001, 0002, 0004, 0005
0007, 0009, 0011
Models: CIMR-V2A0030, 0040

CIMR-V4A0018, 0023 Model: CIMR-V2A0069
Models: CIMR-V2A0056
CIMR-V4A0031, 0038
Model: CIMR-VBA0018
Figure 3.3 Main Circuit Terminal Block Configurations
3.3 Protective Covers

Follow the procedure below to remove the protective covers before wiring the drive and to
reattach the covers after wiring is complete.
u IP20/Open-Chassis Front and Bottom Cover Removal and

Installation
n Removing the Protective Covers

1. Loosen the screw that locks the front cover in place to remove.
Figure 3.4 Remove the Front Cover on an IP20/Open-Chassis Drive
2. Apply pressure to the tabs on each side of the terminal cover. Pull the terminal cover
away from the drive while pushing in on the tabs to pull the cover free.
Figure 3.5 Remove the Terminal Cover on an IP20/Open-Chassis Drive
n Reattaching the Protective Covers

Properly connect all wiring and route power wiring away from control signal wiring. Reattach
all protective covers when wiring is complete. Apply only a small amount of pressure to lock
the cover back into place.
Figure 3.6 Reattach the Protective Covers on an IP20/Open-Chassis Drive
u IP20/NEMA Type 1 Front and Bottom Cover Removal and

Installation
n Removing the Protective Covers on an IP20/NEMA Type 1 Design
1. Loosen the screw on the front cover to remove the front cover.
Figure 3.7 Remove the Front Cover on an IP20/NEMA Type 1 Drive
2. Loosen the screw on the terminal cover to remove the terminal cover and expose the
conduit bracket.
A
B
A – Conduit bracket B – Terminal cover
Figure 3.8 Remove the Terminal Cover on an IP20/NEMA Type 1 Drive
3. Loosen two screws attaching the conduit bracket to remove.
A
A – Conduit bracket
Figure 3.9 Remove the Conduit Bracket on an IP20/NEMA Type 1 Drive
n Reattaching the Protective Covers

Pass power wiring and control signal wiring through the exit holes on the bottom of the conduit
bracket of the drive. Place power wiring and control signal wiring in separate conduits.
Properly connect all wiring after installing the drive and connecting other devices. Reattach
all protective covers when wiring is complete.
A – Pass power wiring and control signal wiring through different

exit holes at the bottom of the drive.
Figure 3.10 Reattach the Protective Covers and Conduit Bracket on an IP20/NEMA
Type 1 Drive
u IP20/NEMA Type 1 Top Cover Removal and Installation
To improve the ambient temperature rating of a NEMA Type 1 drive from 40 °C to 50 °C or
to mount NEMA Type 1 drives side-by-side, the top cover can be removed. Remove the top
cover and set L8-35 to “2”.
Note: Removing the top cover of a NEMA Type 1 drive converts the drive to an IP20/Open-Chassis rating,
and the drive will no longer have a NEMA Type 1 rating.
n Removing the Top Cover

Insert the blade of a straight-edge screwdriver into the opening of the top cover. Gently lift 3
up on the front cover as indicated by the arrow in Figure 3.11 to remove it from the drive.
Figure 3.11 Removing the Top Cover
n Reattaching the Top Cover

Align the connection tabs on the underside of the top cover with the connection tabs on the
drive. Pinch in on the top cover to click the cover into place on the drive.
Connection tabs
Figure 3.12 Reattaching the Top Cover
3.4 Main Circuit Wiring

This section describes the functions, specifications, and procedures required to safely and
properly wire the main circuit of the drive.
NOTICE: Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the drive. Soldered wiring connections can loosen
over time. Improper wiring practices could result in drive malfunction due to loose terminal connections.
u Main Circuit Terminal Functions

Table 3.1 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Terminal Type Function Reference
R/L1 Connects line power to the drive.
Main circuit power Drives with single-phase 200 V input power use terminals R/
S/L2 –
supply input L1 and S/L2 only.
T/L3 Do NOT use T/L3.
U/T1
V/T2 Drive output Connects to the motor. 66
W/T3
B1 Available for connecting a braking resistor or the braking
Braking resistor –
B2 resistor unit option.
⊕1 These terminals are shorted at shipment. Remove the shorting
DC link choke bar between ⊕1 and ⊕2 when connecting a DC link choke to –
⊕2 connection
this terminal.
⊕1 DC power supply For connecting a DC power supply. –
⊖ input
Ground Grounding Terminal 66

(2 terminals)
u Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques 3

Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 3.2 through Table 3.4.
Note: 1. Wire gauge recommendations based on drive continuous current ratings using 75 °C 600 Vac vinyl-
sheathed wire assuming ambient temperature within 30 °C and wiring distance shorter than 100 m.
2. Terminals ⊕1, ⊕2, ⊖, B1 and B2 are for connecting optional devices such as a braking resistor. Do
not connect other non-specified devices to these terminals.
• Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge
when the voltage drop is greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is
suitable for the terminal block. Use the following formula to calculate the amount of voltage
drop:
• Line drop voltage (V) = 3 x wire resistance (Ω/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-3
• Refer to instruction manual TOBP C720600 00 for braking unit or braking resistor unit
wire gauges.
• Refer to UL Standards Compliance on page 221 for information on UL compliance.
n Single-Phase 200 V Class

Table 3.2 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications
Recomm. Tightening
Drive Wire Range Screw
Terminal Gauge Torque
Model AWG, kcmil Size
AWG, kcmil N•m (lb.in.)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 18 to 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 18 to 14
BA0001
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 18 to 14 0.8 to 1.0
BA0002 M3.5 (7.1 to 8.9)
BA0003
B1, B2 – 18 to 14
14 18 to 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
BA0006 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
BA0010 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 2.3 to 2.5
BA0012 M4 (20.4 to 22.1)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 8 12 to 8
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 12 to 8 2.3 to 2.5
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 12 to 8 (20.4 to 22.1)
BA0018 M5
B1, B2 – 12 to 8
2 to 2.5
8 12 to 8 (17.7 to 22.1)
n Three-Phase 200 V Class

Recomm. Tightening
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 18 to 14
2A0001 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 18 to 14
2A0002 ⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 18 to 14 0.8 to 1.0
M3.5
2A0004 (7.1 to 8.9)
2A0006 B1, B2 – 18 to 14
14 18 to 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
2A0010 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
2A0012 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 14 to 10
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
2A0020 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
8
8
10 to 6
10 to 6
3
2.1 to 2.3
M4
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 10 to 6 (18.6 to 20.4)
2A0030
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
2 to 2.5
8 10 to 6 M5 (17.7 to 22.1)
Recomm. Tightening
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 10 to 6 2.1 to 2.3
M4
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 10 to 6 (18.6 to 20.4)
2A0040
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
2 to 2.5
6 10 to 6 M5 (17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 6 to 4
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 6 to 4 5.4 to 6.0
M6 (47.8 to 53.1)
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 6 to 4
2A0056
2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 10 to 6 M5 (23.9 to 26.6)
5.4 to 6.0
6 8 to 4 M6 (47.8 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3 8 to 2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3 8 to 2 9.9 to 11
M8 (87.6 to 97.4)
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 8 to 2
2A0069
2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 8 to 6 M5 (23.9 to 26.6)
5.4 to 6.0
6 6 to 4 M6 (47.8 to 53.1)
n Three-Phase 400 V Class

Recomm. Tightening
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
4A0001
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
4A0002 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
4A0004
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
14 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
4A0005
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
4A0007 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
4A0009
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
Recomm. Tightening
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
4A0011 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 14 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 14 to 6 2.1 to 2.3
M4
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 6 (18.6 to 20.4)
4A0018
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
2 to 2.5
8 14 to 6 M5 (17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 10 to 6 2.1 to 2.3
M4
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 10 to 6 (18.6 to 20.4)
4A0023
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
2 to 2.5
8 10 to 6 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 8 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 10 to 6 3.6 to 4.0
(31.8 to 35.4)
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 10 to 6 M5
4A0031
2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 14 to 10 (23.9 to 26.6)
5.4 to 6.0
6 10 to 6 M6 (47.8 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 10 to 6 3.6 to 4.0
(31.8 to 35.4)
3
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 10 to 6 M5
4A0038
2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 10 to 8 (23.9 to 26.6)
5.4 to 6.0
6 10 to 6 M6 (47.8 to 53.1)
u Main Circuit Terminal Power Supply and Motor Wiring

This section outlines the various steps, precautions, and checkpoints for wiring the main circuit
terminals and motor terminals.
NOTICE: When connecting the motor to the drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, the phase order
for the drive and motor should match. Failure to comply with proper wiring practices may cause the motor to
run in reverse if the phase order is backward.
NOTICE: Route motor leads U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 separate from all other leads to reduce possible
interference related issues. Failure to comply may result in abnormal operation of drive and nearby equipment.
NOTICE: Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits. Improper
application of noise filters could result in damage to the drive.
NOTICE: Do not connect the AC power line to the output motor terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could
result in death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output
terminals.
n Cable Length Between Drive and Motor

When the cable length between the drive and the motor is too long (especially at low frequency
output), note that the cable voltage drop may cause reduced motor torque. Drive output current
will increase as the leakage current from the cable increases. An increase in leakage current
may trigger an overcurrent situation and weaken the accuracy of the current detection.
Adjust the drive carrier frequency according to the following table. If the motor wiring distance
exceeds 100 m because of the system configuration, reduce the ground currents.
Refer to Table 3.5 to set the carrier frequency to an appropriate level.
Table 3.5 Cable Length Between Drive and Motor
Cable Length 50 m or less 100 m or less Greater than 100 m
Carrier Frequency 15 kHz or less 5 kHz or less 2 kHz or less
Note: When setting carrier frequency, calculate the cable length as the total distance of wiring to all connected
motors when running multiple motors from a single drive.
n Ground Wiring
Follow the precautions to wire the ground for one drive or a series of drives.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on
electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire. Improper equipment grounding may cause
dangerous electrical potentials on equipment chassis, which could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Be sure to ground the drive ground terminal. (200 V Class: Ground to
100 Ω or less, 400 V Class: Ground to 10 Ω or less). Improper equipment grounding could result in death or
serious injury by contacting ungrounded electrical equipment.
NOTICE: Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or large-current electrical
equipment. Improper equipment grounding could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to electrical
interference.
NOTICE: When using more than one drive, ground multiple drives according to instructions. Improper
equipment grounding could result in abnormal operation of drive or equipment.
Refer to Figure 3.13 when using multiple drives. Do not loop the ground wire.
A A B
A – Correct B – Incorrect
Figure 3.13 Multiple Drive Wiring
n Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Shut off the power supply to the drive before wiring the main circuit
terminals. Failure to comply may result in death or serious injury.
Note: A cover placed over the DC Bus and braking circuit terminals prior to shipment helps prevent miswiring.
Cut away covers as needed for terminals with a needle-nose pliers.
A
A – Protective Cover to Prevent Miswiring
Note: The ground terminal screw on IP20/NEMA Type 1 holds the protective cover in place.
3.5 Control Circuit Wiring

u Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions
Drive parameters determine which functions apply to the multi-function digital inputs (S1 to
S7), multi-function digital outputs (MA, MB), multi-function pulse inputs and outputs (RP,
MP) and multi-function photocoupler outputs (P1, P2). The default is called out next to each
terminal in Figure 3.1.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Always check the operation and wiring of control circuits after being
wired. Operating a drive with untested control circuits could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Confirm the drive I/O signals and external sequence before starting test run. Setting parameter
A1-06 may change the I/O terminal function automatically from the factory setting. Refer to Application
Selection on page 96. Failure to comply may result in death or serious injury.
n Input Terminals
Table 3.6 Control Circuit Input Terminals
Type No. Terminal Name (Function) Function (Signal Level) Default Setting
Multi-function input 1 (Closed: Forward
S1 run, Open: Stop)
Multi-function input 2 (Closed: Reverse
S2 run, Open: Stop)
Multi-function input 3 (External fault Photocoupler
S3 24 Vdc, 8 mA
(N.O.)
Multi- Note: Drive preset to sinking mode. When using
Function S4 Multi-function input 4 (Fault reset) source mode, set DIP switch S3 to allow for a 24 Vdc
Digital (±10%) external power supply. Refer to Sinking/
Multi-function input 5 (Multi-step speed Sourcing Mode Switch on page 74.
Inputs S5 reference 1)
Multi-function input 6 (Multi-step speed
S6 reference 2)
S7 Multi-function input 7 (Jog reference)
SC Multi-function input common (Control Sequence common

common)
HC Power supply for safe disable input +24 Vdc (max 10 mA allowed)
Safe Open: Output disabled
Disable Closed: Normal operation
Input H1 Safe disable input Note: Disconnect wire jumper between HC and H1
when using the safe disable input. The wire length
should not exceed 30 m.
Response frequency: 0.5 to 32 kHz
pulse train input (frequency (Duty Cycle: 30 to 70%)
RP Multi-function (High level voltage: 3.5 to 13.2 Vdc)
reference) (Low level voltage: 0.0 to 0.8 Vdc)
(input impedance: 3 kΩ)
+V Analog input power supply +10.5 Vdc (max allowable current 20 mA)
Main
Frequency A1 Multi-function analog input 1 (frequency Input voltage 0 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ) resolution 1/1000
Reference reference)
Input
Input voltage or input current (Selected by DIP switch
S1 and H3-09) 0 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ),
A2 Multi-function analog input 2 (frequency Resolution: 1/1000
reference) 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω) or 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω),
Resolution: 1/500
AC Frequency reference common 0 Vdc
n Output Terminals
Table 3.7 Control Circuit Output Terminals
Multi-Function MA N.O. (fault)

Digital output
Digital Output <1> MB N.C. output (fault) 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A; 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA (reference value)
MC Digital output common
P1 Photocoupler output 1 (During run)
Multi-Function
Photocoupler P2Photocoupler output 2 (Frequency agree) Photocoupler output 48 Vdc, 2 to 50 mA <2>
Output
PC Photocoupler output common
MP Pulse train output (Output frequency) 32 kHz (max) <3> <4>
Monitor Output AM Analog monitor output 0 to 10 Vdc (2 mA or less) Resolution: 1/1000
AC Monitor common 0V
<1> Do not assign functions to digital relay outputs that involve frequent switching. This may shorten relay
performance life. Switching life is estimated at 200,000 times (assumes 1 A, resistive load). 3
<2> Connect a suppression diode as shown in Figure 3.14 when driving a reactive load such as a relay coil. Ensure
the diode rating is greater than the circuit voltage.
<3> When set for sourcing. +5 V/1.5 kΩ or higher, +8 V/3.5 kΩ or higher, +10 V/10 kΩ or higher.
<4> When set for sinking, the external power supply should be +12 Vdc, ±5% with 16 mA or less.
C
A D
A – External power, 48 V max. C – Coil

B – Suppression diode D – 50 mA or less
Figure 3.14 Connecting a Suppression Diode
n Serial Communication Terminals

Table 3.8 Control Circuit Terminals: Serial Communications
Type No. Signal Name Function (Signal Level)
R+ Communications input (+)
MEMOBUS/Modbus
communication: Use a RS-485 RS-485/422
R- Communications input (-) MEMOBUS/
MEMOBUS/
or RS-422 cable to connect the Modbus communication
Modbus S+ Communications output (+) protocol 115.2 kbps (max.)
Communication drive.
S- Communications output (-)
IG Shield ground 0V
u Terminal Configuration
R+ R- S+ S- IG
P1 P2 PC A1 A2 +V AC AM AC MP
MA MB MC
R+ R– S+ S– IG S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 HC SC H1 RP
P1 P2 PC A1 A2 +V AC AM AC MP
MA MB MC
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 HC SC H1 RP
Figure 3.15 Removable Control Circuit Terminal Block
n Wire Size and Torque Specifications

Select appropriate wire type and size from Table 3.9. For simpler and more reliable wiring,
crimp ferrules to the wire ends. Refer to Table 3.10 for ferrule terminal types and sizes.
Table 3.9 Wire Size and Torque Specifications (Same for All Models)
Bare Wire Terminal Ferrule-Type Terminal
Tightening
Screw Torque Applic. wire
Terminal Applic. wire Recomm. Recomm.
Size N•m size Wire
size mm2 mm2
(in-lbs) mm2 Type
mm2 (AWG) (AWG) (AWG)
(AWG)
Stranded: 0.25
to 1.5
MA, MB, 0.5 to 0.6 (24 to 16) 0.25 to 1.0
M3 0.75 (18) 0.5 (20)
MC (4.4 to 5.3) Single: 0.25 to (24 to 17)
1.5
(24 to 16)
S1-S7, SC, Shielded
RP, +V, A1, Stranded: 0.25 line, etc.
A2, AC, HC, to 1.0
H1, P1, P2, 0.22 to 0.25 (24 to 18) 0.25 to 0.5
M2 0.75 (18) 0.5 (20)
PC, MP, (1.9 to 2.2) Single: 0.25 to (24 to 20)
AM, AC, S 1.5
+, S-, R+, R-, (24 to 16)
IG
n Ferrule-Type Wire Terminations
Crimp a ferrule to signal wiring to improve wiring simplicity and reliability. Use CRIMPFOX
6, a crimping tool manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT.
d1
6 mm
3
d2
Figure 3.16 Ferrule Dimensions
Table 3.10 Ferrule Terminal Types and Sizes

Size mm2 (AWG) Type L (mm) d1 (mm) d2 (mm) Manufacturer
0.25 (24) AI 0.25-6YE 10.5 0.8 2.0
0.34 (22) AI 0.34-6TQ 10.5 0.8 2.0
0.5 (20) AI 0.5-6WH 12 1.1 2.5 PHOENIX CONTACT
0.75 (18) AI 0.75-6GY 12 1.3 2.8
1.0 AI 1-6RD 12 1.5 3.0
u Wiring Procedure
This section describes the proper procedures and preparations for wiring the control terminals.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch the circuit boards while the power is on.
NOTICE: Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, -, +1, +2) and other high-power lines. Improper wiring practices could result in drive malfunction
due to electrical interference.
NOTICE: Separate wiring for digital output terminals MA, MB and MC from wiring to other control circuit lines.
Improper wiring practices could result in drive or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.
NOTICE: Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals. Improper
application of peripheral devices could result in drive performance degradation due to improper power supply.
NOTICE: Insulate shields with tape or shrink tubing to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
Improper wiring practices could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to short circuit.
NOTICE: Connect the shield of shielded cable to the appropriate ground terminal. Improper equipment
grounding could result in drive or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.
Wire the control terminals using Figure 3.17 as a guide. Prepare the ends of the control circuit
wiring as shown in Figure 3.18. Refer to Wire Size and Torque Specifications on page 71.
NOTICE: Do not tighten screws beyond the specified tightening torque. Failure to comply may damage the
terminal block.
NOTICE: Use shielded twisted-pair cables as indicated to prevent operating faults. Improper wiring practices
could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to electrical interference.
Connect control wires as shown in the following figure:
D
Preparing wire
E
A terminal ends
B
C
A – Control terminal block D – Loosen screw to insert
B – Avoid fraying wire wire.
strands when stripping E – Blade depth of 0.4 mm or
insulation from wire. less
Strip length 5.5 mm. Blade width of 2.5 mm or
C – Single wire or stranded less
wire
Figure 3.17 Terminal Board Wiring Guide
F C
A D
B E
A – Drive side
B – Connect shield to ground
D – Control device side
E – Shield sheath (Insulate
3
terminal of drive. with tape)
C – Insulation F – Shield
Figure 3.18 Preparing the Ends of Shielded Cables
3.6 I/O Connections
3.6 I/O Connections
u Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch

Set the DIP switch S3 on the front of the drive to switch the digital input terminal logic between
sinking mode and sourcing mode; the drive is preset to sinking mode.
Table 3.11 Sinking/Sourcing Mode Setting
Set Value Details
SINK Sinking Mode (0 V common): default setting
SOURCE Sourcing Mode (+24 V common)
DIP Switch S3
SINK
SOURCE
Figure 3.19 DIP Switch S3
3.6 I/O Connections
n Transistor Input Signal Using 0 V Common/Sink Mode

When controlling the digital inputs by NPN transistors (0 V common/sinking mode), set the
DIP switch S3 to SINK and use the internal 24 V power supply.
SINK
Shielded cable Drive
S1
Forward run/stop
S2
Reverse run/stop
S3
Multi-function input
SOURCE External fault N.O.

S4
Fault reset
S5
Multi-speed step 1
S6
Multi-speed step 2
S7
Jog reference
SINK
+24V
S3
SOURCE
SC
Figure 3.20 Sinking Mode: Sequence from NPN Transistor (0 V Common)
3.6 I/O Connections
n Transistor Input Signal Using +24 V Common/Source Mode

When controlling digital inputs by PNP transistors (+24 V common/sourcing mode), set the
DIP switch S3 to SOURCE and use an external 24 V power supply.
SINK Shielded cable

Drive
Forward run / stop S1

Multi-function input
Reverse run / stop S2

SOURCE
External fault N.O. S3
Fault rest S4
External Multi-step speed 1 S5
power supply
+24 V Multi-step speed 2 S6
Jog frequency S7
SINK
+24V
S3
SOURCE
SC
Figure 3.21 Source Mode: Sequence from PNP Transistor (+24 V Common)
3.7 Main Frequency Reference
u DIP Switch S1 Analog Input Signal Selection

The main frequency reference can either be a voltage or current signal input. For voltage
signals both analog inputs, A1 and A2, can be used, for current signals A2 must be used.
When using input A2 as a voltage input, set DIP switch S1 to “V” (left position) and program
parameter H3-09 to “0” (0 to +10 Vdc with lower limit) or “1” (0 to +10 Vdc without lower
limit).
To use current input at terminal A2, set the DIP switch S1 to "I" (default setting) and set
parameter H3-09 = “2” or “3” (4-20 mA or 0-20 mA). Set parameter H3-10 = “0” (frequency
reference).
Note: If Terminals A1 and A2 are both set for frequency reference (H3-02 = 0 and H3-10 = 0), the addition of
both input values builds the frequency reference.
Table 3.12 Frequency Reference Configurations

Voltage Input Current Input
Drive Drive
+10.5 V
+V +10.5 V
20 mA current +V 20 mA current
0 to 10 V Main speed Main speed

A1 frequency reference 4 to 20 mA input A1 frequency reference
(voltage input) (voltage input)
or
Main speed 0 to 20 mA input Main speed
A2 frequency reference A2 frequency reference
(current input) (current input)
AC Frequency reference AC Frequency reference
common common
V I
Figure 3.22 DIP Switch S1
Table 3.13 DIP Switch S1 Settings

Setting Value Description
V (left position) Voltage input (0 to 10 V)
I (right position) Current input (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA): default setting
Table 3.14 Parameter H3-09 Details

Setting Default
No. Parameter Name Description Range Setting
Selects the signal level for terminal A2.
0: 0 to +10 V, unipolar input (with lower limit)
H3-09 Frequency ref. (current) 1: 0 to +10 V, bipolar input (no lower limit) 0 to 3 2
terminal A2 signal level selection 2: 4 to 20 mA
3: 0 to 20 mA
3.8 Wiring Checklist

No. Item Page
Drive, peripherals, option cards

1 Check drive model number to ensure receipt of correct model. 28
Check for correct braking resistors, DC link chokes, noise filters, and other peripheral
2 –
devices.
3 Check for correct option card model. –
Installation area and physical setup
4 Ensure area surrounding the drive complies with specifications. 40
Power supply voltage, output voltage
The voltage from the power supply should fall within the input voltage specification range
5 –
of the drive.
6 The voltage rating for the motor should match the drive output specifications. 28
Main circuit wiring
7 Confirm proper branch circuit protection exists per National and Local codes. 52
8 Properly wire the power supply to drive terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3. –
Properly wire the drive and motor together.
The motor lines and drive output terminals R/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 should match in order
9 66
to produce the desired phase order. If the phase order is incorrect, the drive will rotate in
the opposite direction.
10 Use 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire for the power supply and motor lines. 61
Use the correct wire gauges for the main circuit. Refer to Table 3.2, Table 3.3, or Table
11 61
3.4.
• When using comparatively long motor cable, calculate the amount of voltage drop.
Motor rated voltage (V) x 0.02 ≥
61
3
3 x voltage resistance (Ω/km) x cable length (m) x motor rated current (A) x 10-3
• If the cable between the drive and motor exceeds 50 m, adjust the carrier frequency 66
(C6-02) accordingly.
12 Properly ground the drive. 66
Tightly fasten all terminal screws (control circuit terminals, grounding terminals). Refer
13 61
to Table 3.2, Table 3.3, or Table 3.4.
No. Item Page
Set up overload protection circuits when running multiple motors from a single drive.
Power supply Drive MC1 OL1

M1
MC2 OL2
14 M2 –
MCn OLn
Mn
MC1 - MCn ... magnetic contactor

OL 1 - OL n ... thermal relay
Note: Close MC1 through MCn before operating the drive.
If using a braking resistor or dynamic braking resistor unit, install a magnetic contactor.
15 –
Properly install the resistor, and ensure that overload protection shuts off the power supply.
16 Verify phase advancing capacitors are NOT installed on the output side of the drive. –
Control circuit wiring
17 Use twisted-pair cables for all drive control circuit wiring. 68
18 Ground the shields of shielded wiring to the GND terminal. 72

If using a 3-Wire sequence, properly set parameters for multi-function contact input
19 54
terminals S1 through S7, and properly wire control circuits.
20 Properly wire any option cards. –
Check for any other wiring mistakes.
21 –
Only use a multimeter to check wiring.
Properly fasten the control circuit terminal screws in the drive. Refer to Table 3.2, Table
22 61
3.3, or Table 3.4.
23 Pick up all wire clippings. –
Ensure that no frayed wires on the terminal block are touching other terminals or
24 –
connections.
25 Properly separate control circuit wiring and main circuit wiring. –
26 Analog signal line wiring should not exceed 50 m. –
27 Safe Disable Input wiring should not exceed 30 m. –
4
Start-Up
Programming &
Operation
This chapter explains the functions of the LED operator and how
to program the drive for initial operation.
4.1 USING THE DIGITAL LED OPERATOR..............82

4.2 THE DRIVE AND PROGRAMMING MODES.......87
4.3 START-UP FLOWCHARTS................................90
4.4 POWERING UP THE DRIVE...............................95
4.5 APPLICATION SELECTION...............................96
4.6 BASIC DRIVE SETUP ADJUSTMENTS............106
4.7 AUTO-TUNING................................................113
4.8 NO-LOAD OPERATION TEST RUN..................123
4.9 TEST RUN WITH LOAD CONNECTED.............125
4.10 TEST RUN CHECKLIST...................................126
4.1 Using the Digital LED Operator

Use the LED operator to enter run and stop commands, display data, edit parameters, as well
as display fault and alarm information.
u Keys, Displays, and LEDs
12 13
1 11
5
15
3
14
STOP
16
7 8
10
4 6
STOP
V1000
Fref : (Hz)
FWD/REV Sel :
Fout : (Hz)
lout : (A)
Mon1 : (V)
Monitor :
Verify :
SetUpGuide :
Program :
Auto-Tuning :
WARNINGRisk of electric shock.

Read manual before installing.
Wait 1 minute for capacitor discharge after
disconnecting power supply.
To conform to requirements, make sure to
ground the supply neutral for 400V class.
Table 4.1 Keys and Displays on the LED Operator

No. Display Name Function
1 Data Display Area Displays the frequency reference, parameter number, etc.
2 ESC Key Returns to the previous menu.
Moves the cursor to the right.

3 RESET Key Resets the drive to clear a fault situation.
4 RUN Key Starts the drive.
5 Up Arrow Key Scrolls up to select parameter numbers, setting values, etc.
6 Down Arrow Key Scrolls down to select parameter numbers, setting values, etc.
Stops the drive.

Note: Stop priority circuit. Pressing the STOP key will always
7 STOP STOP Key cause the drive to stop the motor, even when a Run command is
active at an external Run command source. Set parameter o2-06
to 0 to disable the STOP key priority.
Selects all modes, parameters, settings, etc.
8 ENTER Key Selects a menu item to move from one display screen to the next.
Switches drive control between the operator (LOCAL) and the
control circuit terminals (REMOTE).
Note: LOCAL/REMOTE key effective during stop in drive
Start-Up Programming
9 LO/RE Selection Key mode. If the digital operator could change from REMOTE to
LOCAL by incorrect operation, set o2-01 (LOCAL/REMOTE
Key Function Selection) to “0” (disabled) to disable LOCAL/
REMOTE key.
& Operation
10 RUN Light Lit while the drive is operating the motor.
11 LO/RE Light Lit while the operator (LOCAL) is selected to run the drive.
12 ALM LED Light
13 REV LED Light 4

Refer to LED Screen Displays on page 84.
14 DRV LED Light
15 FOUT LED Light
No. Display Name Function

Port used for USB Copy Unit, LCD Operator Keypad, and for
connecting to a PC.
NOTICE: Use only specified cable when making

connections to the drive. Failure to comply may damage
16 – Communication Port the drive.
NOTICE: Do not open the port cover wider than 90

degrees. Failure to comply may break the port cover and
leave the unprotected port susceptible to damage.
u LED Screen Displays

Display Lit Flashing Off
• When an alarm occurs
When the drive detects an alarm • oPE detected Normal state (no fault or alarm)
or error • When a fault or error occurs
during Auto-Tuning
Motor is rotating in reverse — Motor is rotating forward
Drive Mode When DriveWorksEZ is used Programming Mode

Auto-Tuning <1>
Displays output frequency (Hz) — —
As illustrated
in this
manual
<1> Refer to the DriveWorksEZ instruction manual for further information.
STOP
u LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications

LED Lit Flashing Flashing Quickly Off
<1>
When a Run command Run command is selected
is selected from the – – from device other than LED
LED operator operator (REMOTE)
(LOCAL)
• During deceleration to • During deceleration
stop at a fast-stop.
During Run • When a Run • During stop by During stop
command is input and
frequency reference is interlock operation.
0 <2>
As shown
<1> Refer to Figure 4.1 for the difference between “flashing” and “flashing quickly”.
<2> Refer to the description for parameter U4-21 on page 206 for information on verifying operation interlock.
1s
ON ON
Flashing
Flashing ON ON ON ON
quickly
& Operation
Figure 4.1 RUN LED Status and Meaning
Drive output frequency

during stop RUN STOP RUN
STOP
/
0 Hz
6 Hz 4
Frequency setting
RUN LED OFF ON OFF OFF
Flashing
Figure 4.2 RUN LED and Drive Operation
u Menu Structure for Digital LED Operator

Description of Key Operations
:
Turn the power on
<1> :
Forward Selection Reverse Selection

DRIVE MODE
:
Output Frequency
Output Current
Note: “XX” characters are shown in this manual.

The drive will display the actual setting values.
Output Voltage
XX
Monitor Display
XX
XX XX XX
Verify Menu
PROGRAMMING MODE
XX XX XX
Application Preset
XXX
Set Up Mode
XX XX XX
XX
Parameter Setting Mode
XX
Auto-Tuning
XX
Figure 4.3 Digital LED Operator Screen Structure
<1> Reverse can only be selected when LOCAL is set.
4.2 The Drive and Programming Modes

The drive functions are divided into two main groups accessible via the Digital LED Operator:
Drive Mode: The Drive mode allows motor operation and parameter monitoring. Parameter
settings cannot be changed when accessing functions in the Drive Mode.
Programming Mode: The Programming Mode allows access to setup/adjust, verify
parameters and Auto-Tuning. The drive prohibits changes in motor operation such as start/
stop when the Digital LED Operator is accessing a function in the Programming Mode.
u Changing Parameter Settings or Values

This example explains changing C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10.0 seconds (default) to
20.0 seconds.
Step Display/Result
1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears.
2.
Press the key until the Setup Mode Screen appears.
3.
Press the key to view the parameter setting display.
4. Scroll through parameters by pressing the key until C1-01
appears.
& Operation
5. Press to view the current setting value (10.0). (Number
farthest to the left flashes)
6.
Press until the desired number is selected. (“1” flashes)
7.
Press the key and enter 0020.0.
4
8.
Press and the drive will confirm the change.
9. The display automatically returns to the screen shown in Step 4.
10.
Press the key until back at the initial display.
u Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE

Entering the run command using the LED operator is referred to as LOCAL, while entering
the run command from an external device via the control circuit terminals or network option
is referred to as REMOTE.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive may start unexpectedly if the Run command is already
applied when switching from LOCAL mode to REMOTE mode when b1-07 = 1, resulting in death or serious
injury. Be sure all personnel are clear of rotating machinery and electrical connections prior to switching
between LOCAL mode and REMOTE mode.
There are two ways to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE.
Note: 1. After selecting LOCAL, the LO/RE light will remain lit.
2. The drive will not allow the user to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE during run.
n Using the LO/RE Key on the LED Operator

Step Display/Result
Press . The LO/RE light will light up. The drive is now in
2. Local. STOP
To set the drive for REMOTE operation, press the key again.
n Using Input Terminals S1 through S7 to Switch between LO/RE

Switch between LOCAL and REMOTE using one of the digital input terminals S1 through
S7 (set the corresponding parameter H1-01 through H1-07 to 1).
Follow the example below to set the digital input terminals.
Note: 1. Refer to Parameter List on page 173 for a list of digital input selections.
2. Setting a multi-function input terminal to a value of 1 disables the LO/RE key on the LED operator.
u Parameters Available in the Setup Group

n Setup Mode (STUP)
Parameters used for this drive are classified into A to U. To simplify the drive setup, frequently
used parameters are selected and input into Setup Mode.
1. To set a parameter, the Setup Mode must be displayed first. Press the Up/Down key
until is displayed.
2. Select the parameter and change the setting. Table 4.2 lists parameters available in
the Setup group. If the desired parameter cannot be set in the Setup mode, use the
Parameter Setting mode.
Note: 1. When parameter A1-02 (Control Method Selection) is changed, some parameter set values are also
changed automatically.
2. Use the “Par” menu in the Programming mode to access parameters not listed in the Setup Group.
3. Display parameters depend on A1-06. Refer to Application Selection on page 96.
Table 4.2 Setup Group Parameters

Parameter Name Parameter Name
A1-02 Control Method Selection E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency
b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 E1-05 Maximum Voltage
b1-03 Stop Method Selection E1-06 Base Frequency
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 E1-13 Base Voltage
C6-01 Duty Selection E2-01 Motor Rated Current
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection E2-04 Number of Motor Poles
& Operation
d1-01 Frequency Reference 1 E2-11 Motor Rate Capacity
d1-02 Frequency Reference 2 H4-02 Terminal AM Gain Setting
d1-03 Frequency Reference 3 L1-01 Motor Protection Function Selection
d1-04 Frequency Reference 4 Stall Prevention Selection during
L3-04 Deceleration
d1-17
E1-01
Jog Frequency Reference
Input Voltage Reference
4
4.3 Start-up Flowcharts

The flowcharts in this section summarize basic steps required to start the drive. Use the
flowcharts to determine the most appropriate start-up method for a given application. The
charts are intended as a quick reference to help familiarize the user with start-up procedures.
Flowchart Subchart Objective Page
A Basic startup procedure and motor tuning. 91
A-1 Simple motor setup with Energy Savings or Speed Search using V/f mode. 92
High-performance operation using Open Loop Vector (OLV) motor
A-2 93
control.
A-3 Operation with Permanent Magnet (PM) motors. 94
Setup of drive using application specific selections. Refer to Application
- -
Selection on page 96.
u Flowchart A: Basic Start-up and Motor Tuning

Figure 4.4, Flowchart A, describes basic start-up sequence for the drive and motor system.
This sequence varies slightly depending on application. Use drive default parameter settings
in simple applications that do not require high precision.
START
Install and wire the drive as explained in Chapters 1, 2, and 3
Apply main power on to the drive

Adhere to safety messages concerning application of power
Application Presets
Yes
A1-06 used ?
TO
No
Set the control mode in parameter A1-02. Refer to

Application
Selection section
Set the basic parameters
* b1-01/02 for frequency reference and run command source selection
* H1-,H2-,H3-,H4-,H6- for I/O terminal setting FROM
* d1- for multi-speed references if used
* C1- and C2- for accel./decel. and S-curve time settings
* C6-01 for heavy/normal duty mode selection
* L3-04 if braking options are used
0: V/f control Control Mode 5: Open Loop Vector for PM motors
A1-02 =
To To 2: Open Loop To
Flowchart A-1 Flowchart A-2 Vector control Flowchart A-3
& Operation
From Flowchart A-1, A-2, or A-3
Run the motor without load; check the rotation direction and operation.
Verify external signal commands to the drive work as desired.
Couple the load or machine to the motor. Run the machine and check for desired operation.
4
Fine tune parameters. Adjust application settings (PID, ...) if necessary.
Check the machine operation and verify parameter settings.
Drive is ready to run the application.
Figure 4.4 Basic Start-up and Motor Tuning
u Subchart A1: Simple Motor Setup with Energy Savings or

Speed Search Using V/f Mode
Figure 4.5, Flowchart A1, describes simple motor setup for V/f control. V/f Motor Control
is suited for the most basic applications such as fans or pumps. This procedure illustrates using
Energy Savings and Speed Estimation Speed Search. V/f control can be used where rotational
auto-tuning cannot be performed.
From
Flowchart
A
Set or verify the V/f pattern settings E1-.
Energy Savings
(b8-01=1)
or
Speed Estimation
Speed Search (b3-24=1)
NO
enabled ? YES
Is the motor cable

longer than 50 m? Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning
for V/f Control
(T1-01 = 3)
YES
NO
Perform Stationary Auto-Tuning for
terminal resistance (T1-01 = 2)
Return to
Flowchart
A
Figure 4.5 Simple Motor Setup with Energy Savings or Speed Search Using V/f Mode
u Subchart A2: High Performance Operation Using Open Loop

Vector Motor Control
Figure 4.6, Flowchart A2, describes Open Loop Vector Control for high-performance motor
operation. This is appropriate for applications requiring high starting torque, torque limits,
and improved speed regulation.
From
Flowchart
A
NO Possible for motor to

YES
rotate during tuning? <1>
NO <1> Rotational tuning should

Motor test report/ data be performed with the
sheet available?
load disconnected
YES
Calculate necessary E2-

Enter the data from the motor data Perform Rotating Auto-
parameter data using the
sheet to E2- parameters. Tuning (T1-01 = 0)
nameplate information.
Is the motor cable
YES
longer than 50 m?
& Operation
Perform Stationary Auto-Tuning for
NO terminal resistance (T1-01 = 2)
Return to
Flowchart
A 4
Figure 4.6 Flowchart A2: High Performance Operation Using Open Loop Vector Motor
Control
u Subchart A3: Operation with Permanent Magnet Motors

Figure 4.7, Flowchart A3, describes tuning for PM motors in Open Loop Vector Control. PM
motors can be used for energy savings in reduced or variable torque applications.
From
Flowchart
A
Motorcode is known ?
For parameter E5-01 NO
(for Yaskawa PM Motors)
YES Enter “FFFF” to parameter

E5-01
Set the motor code to Enter the motor data into

parameter E5-01 parameters E5-02 to E5-24
Return to
Flowchart
A
Figure 4.7 Operation with Permanent Magnet Motors
4.4 Powering Up the Drive
4.4 Powering Up the Drive

u Powering Up the Drive and Operation Status Display
n Powering Up the Drive

Review the following checklist before turning the power on.
Item to Check Description
Ensure the power supply voltage is correct:
200 V class: single-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz
Power supply voltage
Properly wire the power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3).
(for single-phase 200 V class models, wire only R/L1 and S/L2)
Check for proper grounding of drive and motor.
Drive output terminals Properly wire drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 with motor terminals U, V,
and motor terminals and W.
Control circuit Check control circuit terminal connections.
terminals
Drive control terminal Open all control circuit terminals (off).
status
Status of the load
and connected Uncouple the motor from the load.
machinery
n Status Display
& Operation
When the power supply to the drive is turned on, the LED operator lights will appear as
follows:
No. Name Description
Normal The data display area displays the frequency reference. is lit.
Operation
4
Data displayed varies by the type of fault. Refer to Fault Displays,
Fault Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 131 for more information and
STOP
Main circuit low voltage (ex) possible solution. and are lit.
Note: Display will vary depending on drive settings.

STOP
4.5 Application Selection

Several Application Presets are available to facilitate drive setup for commonly used
applications. Selecting one of these Application Presets automatically sets the required
parameters to the Application Preset default values and selects I/Os. In addition, the
parameters most likely to be changed are assigned to the list of User Parameters, A2-01
through A2-16. These can be accessed in the Setup Mode and provide quicker application
adjustment by eliminating the need to scroll through multiple menus.
The following presets can be selected:
Note: 1. Do not set any value outside the allowable range for A1-06. Setting an out-of-range value will cause
“APPL” to flash on the display in the Setup group and disable the up and down arrow keys on the
digital operator. To fix this error, press the ESC key to return to the Setup group and then it will then
be possible to switch to another mode using the up and down arrow keys.
2. A1-06 setting can only be changed by initializing the drive by first setting A1-03 to 2220. Setting
A1-06 to a value that is out of range will not adversely affect drive operation. When the drive should
not be initialized because initialization will cause other problems, then A1-06 does not need to be
changed.
WARNING! Confirm the drive I/O signals and external sequence before performing a test run. Setting
parameter A1-06 may change the I/O terminal function automatically from the default setting. Failure to comply
may result in death or serious injury.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default

0: Disabled
1: Water supply pump
2: Conveyor
3: Exhaust fan
A1-06 Application Preset 4: HVAC 0
5: Compressor
<1>
8: Conveyor 2 <2>
<1> Application Preset settings 6 and 7 are only available in drive software versions PRG: 5010, PRG: 1010, and
PRG: 1011. To determine the drive software version, refer to the PRG: field on the drive nameplate or drive
parameter U1-25.
<2> Available in drive software versions PRG: 1020 and later.
u Setting 1: Water Supply Pump Application

Table 4.3 Water Supply Pump Parameter Settings
No. Name Default Setting
A1-02 Control Method Selection 0: V/f Control
b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection 1: Reverse Prohibited
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 1.0 s
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 1.0 s
No. Name Default Setting

C6-01 Drive Duty Selection 1: Normal Duty
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection 0FH
E1-07 Middle Output Frequency 30.0 Hz
E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage 50.0 V
L2-01 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection 1: Enabled
Stall Prevention Selection during
L3-04 1: Enabled
Deceleration
Table 4.4 Water Supply Pump: User Parameters (A2-01 to A2-16)

No. Parameter Name No. Parameter Name
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage
b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 E2-01 Motor Rated Current
Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal
b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection H1-05 S5 Function Selection
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 H1-06 S6 Function Selection
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 H1-07
S7 Function Selection
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection L5-01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts
E1-07 Middle Output Frequency − −
u Setting 2: Conveyor Application
& Operation
Table 4.5 Conveyor: Parameter Settings
No. Parameter Name Default Setting
4
C6-01 Drive Duty Selection 0: Heavy Duty
L3-04 1: Enabled
Deceleration
Table 4.6 Conveyor: User Parameters (A2-01 to A2-16)

A1-02 Control Method Selection C1-02 Deceleration Time 1
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 E2-01 Motor Rated Current

b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 L3-04 Deceleration
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 − −
u Setting 3: Exhaust Fan Application

Table 4.7 Exhaust Fan: Parameter Settings
E1-07 Middle Output Frequency 30.0 Hz
E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage 50.0 V
L3-04 1: Enabled
Deceleration
Table 4.8 Exhaust Fan: User Parameters (A2-01 to A2-16)

b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 E1-07 Middle Output Frequency
b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage
b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection E2-01 Motor Rated Current
b3-01 Speed Search Selection at Start H1-05 S5 Function Selection
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 H1-06 S6 Function Selection
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 H1-07 S7 Function Selection
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection L5-01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts
u Setting 4: HVAC Fan Application

Table 4.9 HVAC Fan: Parameter Settings
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection 3: 8.0 kHz
H2-03 Terminals P2 Function Selection 39: Watt Hour Pulse Output
2: CPU Power Active - Drive will restart if
Momentary Power Loss Operation
L2-01 power returns prior to control power supply
Selection shut down.
L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection 4: Operation at lower speed
L8-38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2: Enabled across entire frequency range.
Table 4.10 HVAC Fan: User Parameters (A2-01 to A2-16)

b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency
b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection E2-01 Motor Rated Current
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 H3-11 Terminal A2 Gain Setting
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 H3-12 Terminal A2 Bias Setting
Momentary Power Loss Operation
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection L2-01
& Operation
Selection
d2-01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection
d2-02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit o4-12 kWh Monitor Initialization
u Setting 5: Compressor Application

4
Table 4.11 Compressor: Parameter Settings

L3-04 1: Enabled
Deceleration
Table 4.12 Compressor: User Parameters (A2-01 to A2-16):

b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 E1-07 Middle Output Frequency
b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 E2-01 Motor Rated Current
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 − −
u Setting 6: Preset 6
Note: 1. Read the instructions listed in Notes on Controlling the Brake when Using Application Preset 6 on
page 101 when using Application Preset 6
2. Perform Auto-Tuning after selecting Application Preset 6.
3. If UL3 appears on the operator display after Auto-Tuning is complete, set L6-01 to “0” to repeat the
Auto-Tuning process.
Table 4.13 Preset 6: Parameters and Settings

A1-02 Control Method Selection 2: Open Loop Vector Control
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 0: Operator
b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start 3.0 Hz
b6-02 Dwell Time at Start 0.3 s
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection 2: 5 kHz
d1-01 Frequency Reference 1 6.0 Hz
H2-02 Terminals P1 Function Selection 37: During Frequency Output

H2-03 Terminals P2 Function Selection 5: Frequency Detection 2
Momentary Power Loss Minimum
L2-03 0.3 s
Baseblock Time
Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery 0: Disabled
L3-04 Ramp Time
L4-01 Speed Agreement Detection Level 2.0 Hz
L4-02 Speed Agreement Detection Width 0.0 Hz
L6-01 Torque Detection Selection 1 8: UL3 at RUN - Fault
L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1 5%
L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1 0.5 s
L8-05 Input Phase Loss Protection Selection 1: Enabled <1>
L8-07 Output Phase Loss Protection Selection 1: Enabled
L8-38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 1: Enabled below 6 Hz
L8-41 High Current Alarm Selection 1: Enabled (alarm is output)
<1> Disable L8-05 for single-phase models.
Table 4.14 Preset 6: User Parameters (A2-01 to A2-16):

A1-02 Control Method Selection d1-02 Frequency Reference 2
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 d1-03 Frequency Reference 3
b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage
Terminals MA, MB, and MC Function
& Operation
b6-02 Dwell Time at Start H2-01 Selection
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 L1-01 Motor Overload Protection Selection
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 L4-01 Speed Agreement Detection Level
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1
d1-01 Frequency Reference 1 L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1 4
u Notes on Controlling the Brake when Using Application
Preset 6
The frequency detection function is used for controlling the brake.
When an external Baseblock command is present while a Run command is active, the
frequency reference will be kept as long as the Run command is active. To avoid improper
brake operation make sure that frequency detection is set so that the brake does not open during
Baseblock (L4-07 = “0”, default).
The table below shows how to set up the drive when using output terminals P2-PC as brake
control output.
Brake Open/Close Brake Activation Level Control Mode
OLV
Function Parameter Signal Parameter V/f OLV for PM
Frequency L4-07 = 0 Frequency Detection Level L4-01 = 1.0 to 3.0 Hz <1>

O O −
Detection 2 H2-03 = 5 Frequency Detection Width L4-02 = 0.0 to 0.5 Hz <2>
<1> This is the setting recommended when using Open Loop Vector Control. In V/f Control, set the level as the
motor rated slip frequency plus 0.5 Hz. Not enough motor torque will be created if this value is set too low, and
the load may tend to slip. Make sure this value is greater than the minimum output frequency and greater than
the value of L4-02 as shown in the diagram below. If set too high, however, there may be a jolt at start.
<2> Hysteresis for Frequency Detection 2 can be adjusted by changing the Frequency Detection Width (L4-02)
between 0.0 and 0.5 Hz. If the load slips during stop, make changes in steps of 0.1 Hz until the load no longer
slips.
L4-01
L4-02
output time
frequency
ON OFF
Frequency
Dectection 2
Figure 4.8 Frequency Detection 2
The braking sequence should be designed as follows:

• A normally open signal (N.O.) should be used to control the brake so that it is released
when terminal P2-PC closes.
• When an Up or Down command is entered, the brake should release.
• When a fault signal is output, the brake should close.
• When changing the speed using an analog signal, make sure that the source of the frequency
reference is assigned to the control circuit terminals (b1-01 = 1).
• A sequence to open and close the holding brake appears in the diagram below.
OFF ON
S1-SC UP
Input
S6-SC Fast/Slow OFF ON
b6-02
d1-01 (Enabled when b1-01 = 0)
d1-03
Output frequency
L4-01 b6-01 b2-01
0
Time
Output DC Injection braking
Frequency Detection 2
(H2-03＝05) ON OFF
P2-PC
Holding brake
Closed Open Closed
Figure 4.9 Holding Brake Time Chart
u Setting 7: Preset 7
Table 4.15 Preset 7: Parameters and Settings
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 0: Operator
& Operation
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection 2: 5 kHz
H1-05 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S5

Function 3: Multi-Step Speed 1 4
Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S6
H1-06 4: Multi-Step Speed 2
Function
H2-02 Terminals P1 Function Selection 37: During frequency output
L3-04 0: Disabled
Deceleration
L8-05 Input Phase Loss Protection Selection 1: Enabled <1>

L8-07 Output Phase Loss Protection Selection 1: Triggered when a single phase is lost
L8-41 High Current Alarm Selection 1: Enabled (alarm output)
<1> Disable L8-05 for single-phase models.
Table 4.16 Preset 7: User Parameters (A2-01 to A2-16):

b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 d1-03 Frequency Reference 3
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 E2-01 Motor Rated Current
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 H1-05 S5 Function
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection H1-06 S6 Function
Terminals MA, MB, and MC Function
d1-01 Frequency Reference 1 H2-01 Selection
d1-02 Frequency Reference 2 L1-01 Motor Overload Protection Selection
u Setting 8: Conveyor Application 2

This setting is available in drive software versions PRG: 1020 and later.
Table 4.17 Conveyor 2: Parameters and Settings
L3-04 0: Disabled
Deceleration
n3-13 Overexcitation Deceleration Gain 1.4
n3-21 High-Slip Suppression Current Level 150%
Table 4.18 Conveyor 2: User Parameters (A2-01 to A2-16):

A1-02 Control Method Selection E2-01 Motor Rated Current
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 L3-04 Deceleration
b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 n3-13 Overexcitation Deceleration Gain
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 n3-21 High-Slip Suppression Current Level
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 – –
& Operation
4
4.6 Basic Drive Setup Adjustments

This section explains the basic settings required for initial drive operation. Checking these
basic parameter settings during start-up will help to ensure a successful drive start-up.
If more information is required for parameters not listed in this section, Refer to Parameter
List on page 173 as required for a complete listing of drive parameters.
u Control Mode Selection: A1-02

Note: 1. Be sure to perform Auto-Tuning when using one of the vector control modes.
2. Reinitializing the drive does not reset A1-02 to the factory default value.
n Available Control Modes

Three motor control modes are available. Select the control mode that best suits the application
in which the drive will be used.
Control Mode Parameter Main Applications
• General variable speed applications
A1-02 = 0 • For running multiple motors from a single drive
V/f Control (default) • When replacing a drive in which parameter settings are
unknown.
• General variable speed applications
Open Loop Vector Control A1-02 = 2
• Applications requiring high precision, high speed control.
Variable torque applications employing permanent magnet motors
PM Open Loop Vector Control A1-02 = 5 and energy savings.
u Initialize Parameter Values: A1-03

Parameter A1-03 (Initialize Parameters) resets all parameters to the original default values.
Note: 1. Save all changed parameter settings by setting o2-03 = ”1” before initializing the drive. Settings will
be lost if performing a 2-Wire or 3-Wire initialization using 2220 or 3330 if user parameters are not
saved first.
2. If using Open Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2), Auto-Tuning will need to be performed again after
the drive is initialized. Refer to Auto-Tuning on page 113 for details.
n Different Methods of Drive initialization

1110: Resets all parameters to user-defined default values
A user-initialization resets all parameters to a user-defined set of default values previously
saved to the drive. Set parameter o2-03 to “2” to clear those values.
Note: Set o2-03 to “1” to save the current parameter settings and changes for a “user-initialization.” After
saving all parameter setting changes, parameter o2-03 automatically returns to 0. .
2220: 2-Wire Initialization

Returns all parameters to factory default values for 2-Wire control. A 2-Wire sequence assigns
functions to input terminals S1 and S2.
Returns all parameters to factory default values for 3-Wire control. A 3-Wire sequence assigns
functions to input terminals S1, S2, and S5.
5550: Uploads Parameter Data from the Removable Control Circuit Terminal Board
Replacing either the removable control circuit terminal board or the drive and applying main
power may result in an oPE04 fault. If parameter setting data in the removable control circuit
terminal board is correct, set A1-03 to “5550” to upload the data to the drive.
Note: Refer to Run Command Input Selection: b1-02 on page 109 for more information on a 2-Wire and 3-
Wire sequence.
Note: Initializing the drive for 2-Wire sequence (A1-03 = 2220) returns all drive parameters to factory settings.
Back up all parameters in the event of accidental initialization. the data with 2-Wire sequence returns
all the set parameters to the factory settings.
u Frequency Reference Source: b1-01

This section explains how to assign the frequency reference. Parameters b1-01 and b1-02 can
be used to select the source of the run command and the frequency reference independently
(e.g., set the reference from the operator and set the run command from the terminals).
n Frequency Reference from the LED Operator: b1-01 = 0
When b1-01 = 0 the frequency reference will be provided by the LED operator. Refer to The
Drive and Programming Modes on page 87 for information on how to set the frequency
reference.
& Operation
n Frequency Reference from the Analog Input Terminal: b1-01 = 1
When b1-01 = 1, analog inputs A1 and A2 provide the frequency reference.
Note: Set H3-02 (Terminal A1 Function Selection) to “0” to configure Terminal A1 for the main analog
frequency reference.
Using a Single Analog Signal (V or I) as the Frequency Reference 4
Control Circuit Terminal A1 (Voltage Input):
When entering the main frequency reference with a voltage signal, use the voltage input set
up in control circuit terminal A1.
Drive
+ V (+10.5 V, 20 mA)
0 to 10 V
2 kW A1 Main Frequency Reference
(voltage input)
A2 Auxiliary Frequency Reference
(voltage/current input)
AC Frequency Reference
Common
Figure 4.10 Voltage Input for the Main Frequency Reference
Control Circuit Terminal A2 (Voltage/Current Input):

Use control circuit Terminal A2 when supplying the frequency reference with a current signal
between 4 to 20 mA. Use the following switch and parameter settings to configure Terminal
A2 for 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA input.
Switching between Main/Auxiliary Frequency References
To configure the frequency reference to switch between analog input A1 and A2 (main/aux
frequency switch), use the following setup:
1. Set the frequency reference source to terminals (b1-01 = “1”).
2. Set one of the digital inputs to auxiliary reference 1, H1- = “3” (preset for terminal
S5).
3. Set input signal type of terminal A2 using dip switch S1 and parameter H3-09.
4. Set the function of analog input A2 to Auxiliary frequency (H3-10 = “3”).
When the digital input assigned in step 2 is off, terminal A1 is the frequency reference input.
If it is closed, the A2 input value becomes the frequency reference. The active acceleration/
deceleration times are used for the change-over between the values
Drive
+ V (+10.5 V, 20 mA)
2k A1 Main Frequency Reference

(voltage input)
2k A2 Aux Frequency Reference 1

(voltage input)
AC Frequency Reference Common
S5 Multi-Function Digital Input
SC Digital Input Common
Figure 4.11 Switching between Main/Auxiliary Frequency References
u Run Command Input Selection: b1-02

This section explains how to assign the run command input.
Parameters b1-01 and b1-02 can be used to select the source of the run command and the
frequency reference independently, e.g. set the reference from the operator and set the run
command from the terminals.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. When the run command is given by turning on the power to the drive,
the motor will begin rotating as soon as the drive is powered up. Be sure to take proper precautions if using
this setting. Ensure the area around the motor is safe. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
& Operation
n Run the Drive at 6 Hz using the Digital LED Operator: b1-02 = 0
To assign the run command to the operator panel, set parameter b1-01 to “0”. This will set up
the drive to acknowledge the run command through the LED operator. Initialize the run
command using the Run and Stop keys. Upon power up, the drive uses parameter b1-02 to
determine the run command location.
The following procedure indicates how to start and stop the drive through the LED operator
4
after parameter b1-02 has been set to 0.
Note:
When b1-02 (Run Command Selection) is not set to 0 (operator), press to set LOCAL.
Step Display/Result
2. Set the frequency reference to F6.00 (6 Hz).
3.
Press the key to start the motor.
4. The motor should accelerate up to 6 Hz while the RUN light is on.

STOP
off on
STOP
5. Press the key to stop the motor. The RUN light will flash
until the motor comes to a complete stop. flashing off
n Run the Drive using Digital Input Terminals: b1-02 = 1

This setting uses the digital input terminals to enter the run command. The factory setting is
a 2-Wire sequence.
Using a 2-Wire Sequence
Digital Input Terminals ON OFF
S1 Forward Run Stop
S2 Reverse Run Stop
Drive
Forward Run
S1
Reverse Run
S2
SC Digital Input Common
Figure 4.12 Example Wiring Diagram for 2-Wire Sequence
Using a 3-Wire Sequence

When H1-05 (Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S5 Function Selection) = 0, the functions
of terminals S1 and S2 are set to 3-Wire sequence, and the multi-function input terminal
becomes forward/reverse run command terminal.
Stop Button Run Button Drive

(N.C.) (N.O.)
S1 Run Command
Runs when S1 and S2 are closed
(Run button pushed)
S2
Stop Command
Stops when S1 and S2 are open
(Stop button pushed)
S5
FWD/REV Command <1>
SC
Digital Input Common
Figure 4.13 Example Wiring Diagram for 3-Wire Sequence Using Terminal S5
<1> When terminal S5 is open, the motor rotates forward. When closed, the motor rotates in
reverse.
WARNING! When 3-Wire sequence is used, set the drive to 3-Wire sequence before wiring the control
terminals and ensure parameter b1-17 is set to 0 (drive does not accept a run command at power up (default)).
If the drive is wired for 3-Wire sequence but set up for 2-Wire sequence (default) and if parameter b1-17 is
set to 1 (drive accepts a Run command at power up), the motor will rotate in reverse direction at power up of
the drive and may cause injury.
CAUTION! The motor will begin rotating as soon as the power is switched on. Proper precautions must be
& Operation
taken to ensure that the area around the motor is safe prior to powering up the drive. Failure to do so may
result in minor or moderate injury.
Note: Run by Turning on/off the Power Supply. For safety reasons, the drive is initially set up not to accept a
run command at power up (b1-17 = "0"). If a run command is issued at power up, the RUN indicator
LED will flash quickly. To change this and have the run command issued by the drive, change parameter
b1-17 to 1.
u Drive Duty Selection and Carrier Frequency Selection: C6-01 4

and C6-02
n Drive Duty Selection: C6-01
The drive has two different duty modes from which to select based on the load characteristics.
The drive rated current, overload capacity, carrier frequency, and maximum output frequency
will change depending upon the duty mode selection. Use parameter C6-01 to select Heavy
Duty (HD) or Normal Duty (ND) for the application. The factory setting is ND. Refer to
Specifications on page 161 for details about the rated current.
n Carrier Frequency Selection: C6-02

Fixed Carrier Frequencies
The carrier frequency can be set using parameter C6-02 as shown in table below.
Parameter Name Description Setting Range Default
1 : 2.0 kHz
2 : 5.0 kHz
3 : 8.0 kHz
4 : 10.0 kHz Determined by
5 : 12.5 kHz A1-02 and
Carrier 6 : 15.0 kHz o2-04.
C6-02 Frequency 7: Swing PWM 1 1 to B, F Reset when
Selection 8: Swing PWM 2 C6-01 is
9: Swing PWM 3 changed.
A: Swing PWM 4
B: Leakage Current Rejection PWM <1>
F : User defined (C6-03 to C6-05)
<1> Available in drive software versions PRG: 1020 and later. Setting B uses a PWM pattern that reduces the amount
of leakage current detected over long wiring distances. This can help reduce alarm detection and problems with
the current monitor that result from leakage current over long wiring distances. This is the same as setting the
carrier frequency to 2 kHz.
Note: 1. Swing PWM uses 2.0 kHz carrier frequency as a base. Applying special PWM patterns minimizes
the audible noise of the motor.
2. The upper limit for the carrier frequency is determined by drive capacity.
u Drive Input Voltage Setting: E1-01

Set E1-01 according to the power supply voltage. This setting serves as a base value for certain
drive protective functions.
NOTICE: Set drive input voltage (not motor voltage) in parameter E1-01 for proper function of the protective
features of the drive. Failure to comply could result in improper drive operation. Set parameter E1-01 to match
the input voltage of the drive.
Parameter Name Description Setting Range Default

Set to the nominal voltage of the incoming line. Sets
Input the maximum and base voltage used by preset V/f 200 V Class: 155 to 255 230 V
E1-01 Voltage patterns (E1-03), and adjusts the levels of drive 400 V Class: 310 to 510 <1>
Setting protective features (e.g., overvoltage, braking resistor
level, stall prevention, etc.).
<1> The default value shown here is for 200 V class drives. Double the value for 400 V class drives.
4.7 Auto-Tuning
4.7 Auto-Tuning
u Types of Auto-Tuning
There are three types of Auto-Tuning. Select the best type of Auto-Tuning for the application.
Refer to Auto-Tuning Procedure on page 115.
Type Setting Application Conditions and Benefits Control Mode
• Assumes the motor can rotate during the
Auto-Tuning process
• Improves torque compensation, slip
Rotational compensation, energy savings, and Speed Search V/f Control
Auto-Tuning T1-01 = 3 performance
for V/f Control
• Should be performed when Speed Estimation
Type Speed Search or Energy Saving is used in
V/f Control
• Assumes the motor can rotate during the
Rotational Auto- Auto-Tuning process
Tuning T1-01 = 0 • Achieves high-performance motor control and Open Loop Vector Control
for OLV Control should be performed whenever Open Loop
Vector Control is used
Stationary Auto- For use when:
Tuning • The motor cable exceeds 50 m
for Line-to-Line V/f Control, Open Loop
T1-01 = 2 • The motor cable length has been modified after
Resistance (V/f Vector Control
and OLV Auto-Tuning has been previously performed
Control) • When motor capacity and drive capacity differ
Note: Auto-Tuning cannot be performed on permanent magnet motors (IPM, SPM, etc.).
& Operation
u Before Auto-Tuning the Drive
Check the items below before Auto-Tuning the drive.
n Basic Auto-Tuning Preparations

• Auto-Tuning automatically determines the electrical characteristics of the motor. This is
4
fundamentally different from other types of Auto-Tuning features used in servo systems.
• Auto-Tuning requires the user to input data from the motor nameplate. Make sure the
information written on the nameplate is available before Auto-Tuning the drive.
• For best performance, be sure the drive input supply voltage equals or exceeds the motor
rated voltage.
Note: Performance can be enhanced by using a motor with a base voltage that is 20 V (40 V for 400 V class
models) lower than the input supply voltage. This may be of special importance when operating the
motor above 90% of base speed, where high torque precision is required.
4.7 Auto-Tuning
• Auto-Tuning is not possible with permanent magnet motors.

• To cancel Auto-Tuning, press the STOP key on the LED operator.
• Table 4.19 describes digital input and output terminal status during Auto-Tuning.
Table 4.19 Digital Input and Output Operation During Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning Type Digital Input Digital Output
Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f Control Not available Functions the same as during normal operation
Rotational Auto-Tuning for OLV Control Not available Functions the same as during normal operation
Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Not available Maintains the status at the start of Auto-Tuning
Resistance
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not release the mechanical brake during stationary Auto-Tuning.
Inadvertent brake release may cause damage to equipment or injury to personnel. Ensure that the mechanical
brake release circuit is not controlled by the drive multi-function digital outputs.
Note: It is recommended that Rotational Auto-Tuning is performed with the load disconnected. Failure to
comply could result in improper drive operation. If Rotational Auto-Tuning is performed for a motor
coupled to a load, the motor constants will be inaccurate and the motor may exhibit abnormal operation.
Disconnect or decouple the motor from the load.
n Notes on Rotational Auto-Tuning

• For optimal performance, Auto-Tuning should only be done with the motor uncoupled from
the load for applications requiring high performance over a wide speed range.
• If motor and load can not be uncoupled, the load should be lower than 30% of the rated
load. Performing Rotational Auto-Tuning with a higher load will set motor parameters
incorrectly, and can cause irregular motor rotation.
• Ensure the motor-mounted brake is fully released if installed.
• Connected machinery should be allowed to rotate the motor.
n Notes on Stationary Auto-Tuning for Terminal Resistance Only

• If the motor cable lead length has been significantly modified after Auto-Tuning has already
been performed, perform Stationary Auto-Tuning with the new cables.
• Perform when using motor cables longer than 50 m with V/f Control.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. When executing stationary Auto-Tuning for line-to-line resistance only,
the motor does not rotate, however, power is applied. Do not touch the motor until Auto-Tuning is completed.
Failure to comply may result in injury from electrical shock.
4.7 Auto-Tuning
u Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes

If tuning results are abnormal or the STOP key is pressed before completion, Auto-Tuning
will be interrupted and a fault code will be displayed on the digital operator.
A B
A – Normal Auto-Tuning B – Auto-Tuning Interrupted

Display
Figure 4.14 Auto-Tuning Interruption Display
u Performing Auto-Tuning
n Auto-Tuning Procedure
Auto-Tuning should generally be performed in the following steps.
1. Refer to Before Auto-Tuning the Drive on page 113.
2. Determine which type of Auto-Tuning best fits the application requirements following
Figure 4.15.
& Operation
4
4.7 Auto-Tuning
START
Select the Motor Control Mode A1-02
V/f Control Open Loop Vector PM Open LoopVector Control

A1-02 = 0 A1-02 = 2 A1-02 = 5
Select a V/f pattern Select the motor code

E1-03 (E5-01) or set motor data
manually in E5-
NO Is the total
Can the load be connected load
Will the application expected to be less
allow motor rotation disconnected from than 30% of the motor
for Auto-Tuning? the motor? rating?
YES YES NO
NO
YES NOTICE: Auto-Tuning with
Is the cable a connected load is possible,
between the motor but may result in less than
and drive longer optimum performance.
than 50 m?
V/f Rotational
Auto-Tuning YES NO
(T1-01 = 3)
Rotational Use V/f control (A1-02 =
Auto-Tuning 0) or set motor
Stationary Auto-Tuning for (T1-01 = 0)
Line-to-Line Resistance parameters manually if
(T1-01 = 2) OLV control is needed
Run the motor without the load.

Fine tune parameters if needed.
Connect the load and run the motor.

Fine tune parameters if needed.
Verify system operates as required.
Auto-Tuning finished.
Figure 4.15 Auto-Tuning Selection
3. Enter the type of Auto-Tuning to parameter T1-01.

4. Enter the motor nameplate data.
4.7 Auto-Tuning
5. Start the Auto-Tuning process when prompted by the drive.

6. If Auto-Tuning was successfully performed, do a test run without the load and make any
necessary parameter adjustments.
7. If the test run was successful, do a test run with the load connected and make parameter
adjustments if necessary.
u Auto-Tuning Example
The following example illustrates how to perform Rotational Auto-Tuning for Open Loop
Vector Control (A1-02 = 2).
n Set the Selected Type of Auto-Tuning

Step Display/Result
2.
Press the key until the Auto-Tuning display appears.
3.
Press to begin setting parameters.
4.
Press to display the value for T1-01.
5.
Press to select the digit to edit.
& Operation
6. Press and set the drive to perform Rotational Auto-Tuning
(00).
7.
Save the setting by pressing .
8. The display automatically returns to the display shown in Step 3.

4
4.7 Auto-Tuning
n Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate

After selecting the type of Auto-Tuning, enter the data required from the motor nameplate.
Note: These instructions continue from Step 8 in “Set the Selected Type of Auto-Tuning”.
Step Display/Result
1.
Press to access the motor output power parameter T1-02.
2.
Press to view the default setting.
3.
Press to select the digit to edit.
4.
Press and enter the motor power nameplate data in kW.
5.
Press to save the setting.
6. The display automatically returns to the display in Step 1.
Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to set the following parameters:

• T1-03, Motor Rated Voltage
• T1-04, Motor Rated Current
7.
• T1-05, Motor Base Frequency
• T1-06, Number of Motor Poles
• T1-07, Motor Base Speed
Note: 1. For the details on each setting, Refer to Input Data for Auto-Tuning on page 119.
2. For Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line resistance only, set T1-02 and T1-04.
n Starting Auto-Tuning
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive and motor may start unexpectedly during Auto-Tuning,
which could result in death or serious injury. Ensure the area surrounding the drive motor and load are clear
before proceeding with Auto-Tuning.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. High voltage will be supplied to the motor when Stationary Auto-Tuning
is performed even with the motor stopped, which could result in death or serious injury. Do not touch the
motor until Auto-Tuning has been completed.
NOTICE: Rotational Auto-Tuning will not function properly if a holding brake is engaged on the load. Failure
to comply could result in improper operation of the drive. Ensure the motor can freely spin before beginning
Auto-Tuning.
NOTICE: Never perform Rotational Auto-Tuning for a motor connected to a load. Failure to comply could
result in improper drive operation. If Rotational Auto-Tuning is performed for a motor coupled to a load, the
motor parameters will be inaccurate and the motor may exhibit abnormal operation. Disconnect or decouple
the motor from the load.
4.7 Auto-Tuning
Enter the required information from the motor nameplate. Press to proceed to the Auto-
Tuning start display.
Note: These instructions continue from Step 7 in “Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate”.
Step Display/Result
After setting T1-07 as illustrated in the previous section, press
1.
and confirm the display is as described below:
Press to activate Auto-Tuning. flashes.

2. Note: The first digit indicates which motor is undergoing Auto-Tuning
(motor 1 or motor 2). The second digit indicates the type of Auto-
Tuning being performed.
3. Auto-Tuning finishes in approximately one to two minutes.
u Input Data for Auto-Tuning

The T1- parameters are used to set the Auto-Tuning input data.
Note: 1. Cycling power to the drive will reset any values set during the Auto-Tuning process to factory
defaults.
2. For motors that are to be operated in the field weakening range, first perform the Auto-Tuning with
the base data, i.e. the frequency at which the motor is operating with its rated voltage (base frequency).
After Auto-Tuning is complete, change the maximum frequency E1-04 to the desired value.
n T1-00: Motor 1/Motor 2 Selection
Selects the motor to be tuned when motor 1/2 switching is enabled, i.e., a digital input is set
for function H1- = 16. This parameter is not displayed if motor 1/2 switching is disabled.
& Operation
No. Name Setting Range Default
T1-00 Motor 1/2 Selection 1 or 2 1
Setting 1: Motor 1
Auto-Tuning automatically sets parameters E1- and E2- for motor 1.
4
Setting 2: Motor 2
Auto-Tuning automatically sets parameters E3- and E4- for motor 2. Make sure that
motor 2 is connected to the drive for Auto-Tuning.
4.7 Auto-Tuning
n T1-01: Tuning Mode Selection

Sets the type of Auto-Tuning to be used. Refer to Types of Auto-Tuning on page 113 for
details on different types of Auto-Tuning.
0, 2 (OLV) 2, 3 (V/f) 0 (OLV) 2 (V/

T1-01 Auto-Tuning Mode Selection f)
Setting 0: Rotating Auto-Tuning for Open Loop Vector Control
Setting 2: Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance
Setting 3: Rotating Auto-Tuning for V/f Control
n T1-02: Motor Rated Power

Used to set the motor rated power according to the motor nameplate value. For optimal
performance, the motor rated power should be between 50 and 100% of the drive rating.
Determined
T1-02 Motor Rated Power <1> by o2-04 and
C6-01
<1> The setting range differs based on drive software version.
PRG: 1016 and later: 0.03 to 650.00 kW
PRG: 1015 and earlier: 0.00 to 650.00 kW
n T1-03: Motor Rated Voltage (T1-01 = 0 or 3)

Used to set the motor rated voltage according to the motor nameplate value. If the motor is
used above its base speed, enter the voltage at base speed here.
For higher tuning precision and better control performance, enter the motor no-load voltage
here if known. The motor no-load voltage is referred as to the voltage needed to operate the
motor under no-load condition at its rated speed. Refer to the motor data sheet.
T1-03 Motor Rated Voltage 0.0 to 255.5 V <1> 200.0 V <1>
<1> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double values when using a 400 V class drive.
4.7 Auto-Tuning
n T1-04: Motor Rated Current

Used to set the motor rated current according to the motor nameplate value. For optimal
performance in OLV, the motor rated current should be between 50 and 100% of the drive
rating. Enter the current at the motor base speed.
Determined
10 to 200% of drive
T1-04 Motor Rated Current by o2-04 and
rated current C6-01
n T1-05: Motor Rated Frequency (T1-01 = 0 or 3)

Used to set the motor rated frequency according to the motor nameplate value. If a motor with
an extended speed range is used or the motor is used in the field weakening area, enter the
base frequency here.
For higher tuning precision and better control performance, enter the motor no-load frequency
here if known. The “no-load frequency” refers to the frequency needed to operate the motor
under no-load condition at its rated speed. Refer to the motor data sheet.
T1-05 Motor Base Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 60.0 Hz
n T1-06: Number of Motor Poles (T1-01 = 0 or 3)
Used to set the number of motor poles according to the motor nameplate value.
& Operation
T1-06 Number of Motor Poles 2 to 48 4
n T1-07: Motor Base Speed (T1-01 = 0 or 3)

Used to set the motor rated speed according to the motor nameplate value. If a motor with an
extended speed range is used or the motor is used in the field weakening area, enter the speed
at base frequency here. 4
T1-07 Motor Base Speed 0 to 24000 r/min 1750 r/min
4.7 Auto-Tuning
n T1-11: Motor Iron Loss (T1-01 = 3)

Provides iron loss information for determining the Energy Saving coefficient. If E2-10 has
been changed and the power has been cycled, the value set to E2-10 will appear as the default
in T1-11. If the value of T1-02 is not changed during Auto-Tuning data input, the drive will
select a value that is typical for the motor power entered to T1-02.
Determined
T1-11 Motor Iron Loss 0 to 65535 W by o2-04 and
C6-01
4.8 No-Load Operation Test Run
u No-Load Operation Test Run

This section explains how to operate the drive with the motor uncoupled from the load during
a test run.
n Before Starting the Motor

Check the following items before operation:
• Ensure the area around the motor is safe.
• Ensure external emergency stop circuitry is working properly and other safety precautions
have been taken.
n During Operation
Check the following items during operation:
• The motor should rotate smoothly (i.e., no abnormal noise or oscillation).
• The motor should accelerate and decelerate smoothly.
n No-Load Operation Instructions

The following example illustrates a test run procedure using the digital operator.
Note: Before starting the motor, set the frequency reference d1-01 to 6 Hz.
Step Display/Result
& Operation
2. Press the key to select LOCAL. The LO/RE LED will turn
4
STOP
on.
Step Display/Result
STOP
3. Press to give the drive a Run command. RUN will light and
the motor will rotate at 6 Hz.
Off On
Motor
4. Ensure the motor is rotating in the correct direction and no faults or

alarms occur.
Forward
If there is no error in step 4, press to increase the frequency

reference. Increase the frequency in 10 Hz increments verifying
5. smooth operation results at all speeds. For each frequency, monitor
the drive output current (U1-03) through the LED operator to confirm
the current is well below the motor rated current. Example: 6 Hz →
60 Hz.
STOP STOP
6. The drive should operate normally. Press to stop the motor.
RUN flashes until the motor comes to a complete stop.
Flashing Off
4.9 Test Run with Load Connected
4.9 Test Run with Load Connected
u Test Run with the Load Connected

After performing a no-load test run connect the load and proceed to run the motor and load
together.
n Notes on Connected Machinery

• Clear the area around the motor.
• The motor should come to a complete stop without problems.
• Connect the machinery.
• Fasten all installation screws properly. Check that the motor and connected machinery are
held in place.
• Confirm that the Fast-stop circuit or mechanical safety measures operate correctly.
• Be ready to press the STOP button in case of emergency.
n Checklist Before Operation

• The motor should rotate in the proper direction.
• The motor should accelerate and decelerate smoothly.
n Operating the Motor under Loaded Conditions
Test run the application similarly to the no-load test procedure when connecting the machinery
to the motor.
& Operation
• Check monitor parameter U1-03 to ensure there is no overcurrent.
• If the application permits running the load in the reverse direction, try changing motor
direction and the frequency reference while watching for abnormal motor oscillation or
vibration.
• Correct any problems that occurs with hunting, oscillation, or other control-related
issues. 4
4.10 Test Run Checklist

Review the checklist before performing a test run. Check each item that applies.
No. Checklist Page
1 Thoroughly read the manual before performing a test run. –
2 Turn the power on. 95
3 Set the voltage for the power supply to E1-01. –
Check the items that correspond to the control mode being used.
WARNING! Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before energizing
the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment. When programmed
for 3-Wire control, a momentary closure on terminal S1 may cause the drive to start.
No. Checklist Page
V/f Control (A1-02 = 0)

Select the best V/f pattern according to the application and motor characteristics.
4 –
Example: If using a motor with a rated frequency of 60.0 Hz, set E1-03 to “1”.
5 Perform Auto-Tuning for Energy Savings if using Energy Saving functions. 113
Open Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2)
6 Uncouple the load from the motor when performing Rotational Auto-Tuning. 113
7 Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning. 113

The following data entered during Auto-Tuning should match the information written
on the motor nameplate:
• motor rated output power (kW) → T1-02
• rated voltage (V) → T1-03
8 –
• rated current (A) → T1-04
• base frequency (Hz) → T1-05
• number of motor poles → T1-06
• motor rotations per minutes (r/min) → T1-07
PM Open Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 5)
9 Set permanent motor parameters E5-01 through E5-24 94
Proceed to the following checklist after checking items 4 through 9.
No. Checklist Page
10 The should illuminate after giving a run command. –

To give a run command and frequency reference from the LED Digital Operator, press
11 88
to set to LOCAL. The LO/RE key lights while LOCAL is displayed.
If the motor rotates in the opposite direction during the test run, switch two of the drive
12 95
output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).
13 Select the correct duty rating (C6-01) for the application. –
Set the correct values for the motor rated current (E2-01) and the motor protection
14 –
selection (L1-01) to ensure motor thermal protection.
If the run command and frequency reference are provided via the control circuit
15 88
terminals, set the drive for REMOTE and be sure the LO/RE light is out.
If the control circuit terminals should supply the frequency reference, select the correct
16 voltage input signal level (0 to 10 V) or the correct current input signal level (4 to 20 88
mA or 0 to 20 mA).
17 Set the proper voltage to terminal A1. (0 to 10 V). –
18 Set the proper current to terminal A2. (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA). –

When current input is used, set H3-09 to “2” (4 to 20 mA) or “3” (0 to 20 mA) and set
19 –
H3-10 to “0”.
When current input is used, switch the drive built-in DIP switch S1 from the V-side
20 –
(OFF) to I-side (ON).
Set the minimum and maximum frequency references to the desired values. Make the
following adjustments if the drive does not operate as expected:
Gain adjustment: Set the maximum voltage/current signal and adjust the analog input
gain (H3-03 for input A1, H3-11 for input A2) until the frequency reference value
21 –
reaches the desired value.
Bias adjustment: Set the minimum voltage/current signal and adjust the analog input
& Operation
bias (H3-04 for input A1, H3-12 for input A2) until the frequency reference value reaches
the desired minimum value.
5
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides descriptions of the drive faults, alarms,
errors, related displays, and possible solutions. This chapter can
also serve as a reference guide for tuning the drive during a trial
run.
5.1 DRIVE ALARMS, FAULTS, AND ERRORS.......130

5.2 FAULT DETECTION........................................ 131
5.3 ALARM DETECTION.......................................152
5.4 OPERATOR PROGRAMMING ERRORS.......... 155
5.5 AUTO-TUNING FAULT DETECTION................156
5.6 DIAGNOSING AND RESETTING FAULTS........159
5.1 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors
5.1 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors
u Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors

Table 5.1 Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Type Drive Responses to Alarms, Faults, and Errors
When the drive detects a fault:
• The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific fault and the ALM indicator LED
remains lit until the fault is reset.
• The fault interrupts drive output and the motor coasts to a stop.
Faults
• Depending on the setting, the drive and motor may stop via different methods than listed.
• If a digital output is programmed for fault output (H2- = E), it will close if a fault occurs.
When the drive detects a fault, it will remain inoperable until that fault has been reset. Refer to
Fault Reset Methods on page 159.
When the drive detects an alarm or a minor fault:
• The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific alarm or minor fault and the ALM
indicator LED flashes.
Minor Faults and • The motor does not stop.
Alarms • One of the multi-function contact outputs closes if set to be tripped by a minor fault (H2-
 = 10), but not by an alarm.
• The digital operator displays text indicating a specific alarm and ALM indicator LED flashes.
Remove the cause of an alarm or minor fault to automatically reset.
When parameter settings conflict with one another or do not match hardware settings (such as
with an option card), it results in an operation error.
When the drive detects an operation error:
Operation Errors • The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific error.
• Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.
When the drive detects an operation error, it will not operate the motor until the error has been
reset. Correct the settings that caused the operation error to reset.
Tuning errors occur while performing Auto-Tuning.
When the drive detects a tuning error:
• The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error.
Tuning Errors • Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.
• Motor coasts to stop.
• Remove the cause of the error and repeat the Auto-Tuning process.
5.2 Fault Detection
5.2 Fault Detection

u Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Table 5.2 Detailed Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions
LED Operator Display Fault Name
Option Communication Error
bUS • After establishing initial communication, the connection was lost.

• Only detected when the run command frequency reference is assigned to an
option card.
Cause Possible Solution
No signal received from the PLC. • Check for faulty wiring.
The communication cable is faulty • Correct the wiring.
or a short circuit exists. • Check for loose wiring and short circuits. Repair as needed.
• Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.
• Counteract noise in control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.
• Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise and
A communications data error use surge suppressors if required.
occurred due to noise. • Use cables recommended by Yaskawa or another type of shielded line. Ground
the shield on the controller side or on the drive input power side.
• Separate all wiring for communications devices from drive input power lines.
Install an EMC noise filter to the input side of the drive input power.
• Replace the option card if there are no problems with the wiring and the error
The option card is damaged. continues to occur.
• The connector pins on the option card are not properly lined up with the
The option card is not properly connector pins on the drive.
connected to the drive.
• Reinstall the option card.
Troubleshooting
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error
CE
Control data was not received for the CE detection time set to H5-09.
• Check for faulty wiring.
Faulty communications wiring, or a • Correct the wiring.
short circuit exists.
• Check for loose wiring and short circuits. Repair as needed.
5
5.2 Fault Detection
• Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.

• Counteract noise in control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.
• Use Yaskawa-recommended cables, or another type of shielded line. Ground
A communications data error the shield on the controller side or on the drive input power side.
occurred due to noise. • Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise and
use surge suppressors if required.
• Separate all wiring for communications devices from drive input power lines.
Install an EMC noise filter to the input side of the drive input power.
Control Fault
CF A torque limit was reached continuously for three seconds or longer during a ramp
to stop while in Open Loop Vector Control.
Motor parameters are not set Check the motor parameter settings and repeat Auto-Tuning.
properly.
Torque limit is too low. Set the torque limit to the most appropriate setting (L7-01 through L7-04).
• Adjust the deceleration time (C1-02, -04, -06, -08).
Load inertia is too big. • Set the frequency to the minimum value and interrupt the run command when
the drive finishes decelerating.
Current Offset Fault
CoF The current sensor is damaged or there was residual induction current in the motor
(e.g., during sudden deceleration or when coasting) when the drive attempted to
start the motor.
Due to residual induction current in • Create a motor restart sequence that allows enough time for the residual
the motor when the drive attempted induction voltage to dissipate.
to start the motor, the drive • Enable Speed Search at start (b3-01 = 1). Use the multi-function terminals to
attempted to adjust the current execute External Speed Search 1 and 2 (H1- = 61 or 62).
offset value beyond the allowable Note: When using a PM motor, both External Speed Search 1 and 2 perform the
range. same operation.
A/D Conversion Error
CPF02
An A/D conversion error occurred.
Control circuit is damaged. Cycle power to the drive. If the problem continues, replace the drive.
• Check for wiring errors along the control circuit terminals.
Control circuit terminals have • Correct the wiring.
shorted out (+V, AC).
Check the resistance of the speed potentiometer and related wiring.
Control terminal input current has • Check the input current.
exceeded allowable levels. • Reduce the current input to control circuit terminal (+V) to 20 mA.
5.2 Fault Detection

PWM Data Error
CPF03
There is a problem with the PWM data.
Drive hardware is damaged. Replace the drive.
EEPROM Data Error
CPF06
There is an error in the data saved to EEPROM.
Control circuit is damaged. Cycle power to the drive. If the problem continues, replace the drive.
The power supply was switched off • Cycle power to the drive and check operation again.
when parameters were written (e.g., • Initialize the drive using A1-03.
using a communications option
card). • If the problem persists after initializing the drive, replace the drive.
Terminal Board Communications Error
CPF07
A communication error occurred at the terminal board.
There is a fault connection between
the terminal board and control Turn the power off and reconnect the control circuit terminals.
board.
EEPROM Serial Communication Fault
CPF08
EEPROM communications are not functioning properly.
Terminal board or control board is Turn the power off and check the control terminal connections.
Troubleshooting
not connected properly.
CPF11 RAM Fault
Hardware is damaged. Replace the drive.
CPF12
FLASH Memory Fault
Problem with the ROM (FLASH memory).
5
5.2 Fault Detection

Watchdog Circuit Exception
CPF13
Self-diagnostics problem.
Control Circuit Fault
CPF14
CPU error (CPU operates incorrectly due to noise, etc.)
Clock Fault
CPF16
Standard clock error.
Timing Fault
CPF17
A timing error occurred during an internal process.
CPF18 CPU error. Non-Maskable Interrupt (An unusual interrupt was triggered by noise,
etc.)
CPF19
CPU error (Manual reset due to noise, etc.)
5.2 Fault Detection

One of the following faults occurred: RAM fault, FLASH memory error,
watchdog circuit exception, clock error
or CPF20 or • RAM fault.
CPF21 • FLASH memory error (ROM error).
• Watchdog circuit exception (self-diagnostic error).
• Clock error.
A/D Conversion Fault
CPF22
A/D conversion error.
• Cycle power to the drive. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page
Control circuit is damaged. 159.
• If the problem continues, replace the drive.
PWM Feedback Fault
CPF23
PWM feedback error.
Drive Capacity Signal Fault
CPF24
Entered a capacity that does not exist. (Checked when the drive is powered up.)
Troubleshooting
CPF25 Terminal Board Not Connected
Terminal board is not connected Reconnect the terminal board to the connector on the drive, then cycle the power
correctly. to the drive.
Speed Deviation (for Simple V/f with PG) 5
dEv According to the pulse input (RP), the speed deviation is greater than the setting
in F1-10 for longer than the time set to F1-11.
Load is too heavy. Reduce the load.
5.2 Fault Detection
Acceleration and deceleration Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
times are set too short.
The load is locked up. Check the machine.
Parameters are not set Check the settings of parameters F1-10 and F1-11.
appropriately.
Motor brake engaged. Ensure the motor brake releases properly.
dWFL DriveWorksEZ Fault
dWAL DriveWorksEZ Program Error Output
Fault output by DriveWorksEZ Correct the cause of the fault.
MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Error
E5
The watchdog timed out.
Data has not been received from the Execute DISCONNECT or ALM_CLR, then issue a CONNECT command or
PLC, triggering the watchdog SYNC_SET command and proceed to phase 3.
timer.
Option Card External Fault
EF0
An external fault condition is present.
An external fault was received from
the PLC with other than F6-03 = 3 • Remove the cause of the external fault.
“alarm only” (the drive continued • Remove the external fault input from the PLC.
to run after external fault).
Problem with the PLC program. Check the PLC program and correct problems.
External Fault (input terminal S1)
EF1
External fault at multi-function input terminal S1.
EF2
EF3
EF4
EF5
5.2 Fault Detection

EF6
EF7
External fault at multi-function input terminal S7
An external device has tripped an Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the fault.
alarm function.
• Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the terminals assigned
Wiring is incorrect. for external fault detection (H1- = 20 to 2F).
• Reconnect the signal line.
Incorrect setting of multi-function • Check if the unused terminals set for H1- = 20 to 2F (External Fault).
contact inputs. • Change the terminal settings.

EEPROM Write Error
Err
Data does not match the EEPROM being written to.
•
Press the button.
- • Correct the parameter settings.
• Cycle power to the drive. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page
159.
Excessive PID Feedback
FbH PID feedback input is greater than the level set b5-36 for longer than the time set
to b5-37. To enable fault detection, set b5-12 = “2” or “5”.
Troubleshooting
Parameters are not set Check the settings of parameters b5-36 and b5-37.
appropriately.
Wiring for PID feedback is Correct the wiring.
incorrect.
There is a problem with the • Check the sensor on the control side.
feedback sensor. • Replace the sensor if damaged.
PID Feedback Loss 5
FbL This fault occurs when PID Feedback Loss Detection is programmed to fault
(b5-12 = 2) and the PID Feedback < PID Feedback Loss Detection Level (b5-13)
for the PID Feedback Loss Detection Time (b5-14).
Parameters are not set Check the settings of parameters b5-13 and b5-14.
appropriately.
5.2 Fault Detection
Wiring for PID feedback is Correct the wiring.

incorrect.
There is a problem with the Check the sensor on the controller side. If damaged, replace the sensor.
feedback sensor.
Ground Fault
• Current shorted to ground exceeded 50% of rated current on output side of the
GF drive.
• Setting L8-09 to 1 enables ground fault detection in models 2A0020 to 2A0069
and 4A0011 to 4A0038.
• Check the insulation resistance of the motor.
Motor insulation is damaged.
• Replace the motor.
• Check the motor cable.
A damaged motor cable is creating • Remove the short circuit and turn the power back on.
a short circuit. • Check the resistance between the cable and the ground terminal .
• Replace the cable.
The leakage current at the drive • Reduce the carrier frequency.
output is too high. • Reduce the amount of stray capacitance.
• The value set exceeds the allowable setting range while the drive automatically
adjusts the current offset (this happens only attempting to restart a PM motor
The drive started to run during that is coasting to stop).
Current Offset Fault or while • Enable Speed Search at start (b3-01 = 1).
coasting to a stop.
• Perform Speed Search 1 or 2 (H1- = 61 or 62) via one of the external
terminals. Note: Speed Search 1 and 2 are the same when using PM OLV.
Hardware problem. • Replace the drive.
Output Phase Loss
LF • Phase loss on the output side of the drive.
• Phase Loss Detection is enabled when L8-07 is set to “1” or “2”.
• Check for wiring errors and ensure the output cable is connected properly.
The output cable is disconnected.
• Correct the wiring.
• Check the resistance between motor lines.
The motor winding is damaged.
• Replace the motor if the winding is damaged.
• Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals.
The output terminal is loose. Refer to Wire Size and Torque Specifications on page 71.
The motor being used is less than Check the drive and motor capacities.
5% of the drive rated current.
An output transistor is damaged. Replace the drive.
A single-phase motor is being used. The drive being used cannot operate a single phase motor.
5.2 Fault Detection

Output current imbalance
LF2
One or more of the phases in the output current is lost.
Phase loss has occurred on the • Check for faulty wiring or poor connections on the output side of the drive.
output side of the drive. • Correct the wiring.
Terminal wires on the output side Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer
of the drive are loose. to Wire Size and Torque Specifications on page 71.
No signal displays from the gate Replace the drive. Contact Yaskawa for assistance.
driver board.
• Measure the line-to-line resistance for each motor phase. Ensure all values are
Motor impedance or motor phases the same.
are uneven.
• Replace the motor. Contact Yaskawa for assistance.
Node Setup Error
nSE
A terminal assigned to the node setup function closed during Run.
The node setup terminal closed
during Run. • Check whether a Run command was accidentally entered via the terminals or
from a comm. option unit.
A Run command was issued while • Turn off the Run command when using the node setup function.
the node setup function was active.
Overcurrent
oC Drive sensors have detected an output current greater than the specified
overcurrent level.
The motor has been damaged due • Check the insulation resistance.
Troubleshooting
to overheating or the motor
insulation is damaged. • Replace the motor.
• Check the motor cables.
One of the motor cables has shorted • Remove the short circuit and power the drive back up.
out or there is a grounding problem. • Check the resistance between the motor cables and the ground terminal .
• Replace damaged cables.
• Measure the current flowing into the motor.
• Replace the drive with a larger capacity unit if the current value exceeds the
rated current of the drive.
5
The load is too heavy.
• Determine if there is sudden fluctuation in the current level.
• Reduce the load to avoid sudden changes in the current level or switch to a
larger drive.
5.2 Fault Detection
Calculate the torque needed during acceleration relative to the load inertia and the
specified acceleration time.
If the right amount of torque cannot be set, make the following changes:
The acceleration or deceleration
times are too short. • Increase the acceleration time (C1-01, -03, -05, -07)
• Increase the S-curve characteristics (C2-01 through C2-04)
• Increase the capacity of the drive.
The drive is attempting to operate a • Check the motor capacity.
specialized motor or a motor larger • Ensure that the rated capacity of the drive is greater than or equal to the capacity
than the maximum size allowed. rating found on the motor nameplate.
Magnetic contactor (MC) on the
output side of the drive has turned Set up the operation sequence so that the MC is not tripped while the drive is
outputting current.
on or off.
• Check the ratios between the voltage and frequency.
V/f setting is not operating as • Set parameter E1-04 through E1-10 appropriately. Set E3-04 through E3-10
expected. when using a second motor.
• Lower the voltage if it is too high relative to the frequency.
• Check the amount of torque compensation.
Excessive torque compensation. • Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss and
less current.
• Review the possible solutions provided for handling noise interference.
Drive fails to operate properly due
to noise interference. • Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit
lines, main circuit lines and ground wiring.
• Check if fault occurs simultaneously to overexcitation function operation.
Overexcitation gain is set too high. • Consider motor flux saturation and reduce the value of n3-13 (Overexcitation
Deceleration Gain).
• Enable Speed Search at start (b3-01 = “1”).
Run command applied while motor
was coasting. • Program the Speed Search command input through one of the multi-function
contact input terminals (H1- = “61” or “62”).
The wrong motor code has been
entered for PM Open Loop Vector Enter the correct motor code to E5-01 to indicate that a PM motor is connected.
(Yaskawa motors only).
Check which motor control method the drive is set to (A1-02).
The motor control method and • For IM motors, set A1-02 = “0” or “2”.
motor do not match.
• For PM motors, set A1-02 = “5”.
The motor cable is too long Use a larger drive.
Option Card Connection Error at Option Port CN5-A
oFA00
The option card is incompatible with the drive.
The option card is incompatible Use a compatible option card.
with the drive.
5.2 Fault Detection

Option Card Fault (Port A)
oFA01
Replace the option card.
The option card is not connected Turn the power off and reconnect the option card.
properly to the drive.
Option Card Fault (port A)
oFA03
Option card self-diagnostic error
Option Card Fault (port A)
oFA04
An error occurred attempting to write to the option card memory.
to oFA30 to Option Card Fault (port A)

oFA43 Communication ID error
Option card or hardware is Replace the option card. Contact Yaskawa for consultation.
damaged.
Heatsink Overheat
oH The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the value set to L8-02. Default value
for L8-02 is determined by drive capacity (o2-04).
• Check the temperature surrounding the drive. Verify temperature is within
drive specifications.
Surrounding temperature is too • Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel.
high.
• Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area.
• Remove anything near the drive that might be producing excessive heat.
Troubleshooting
• Measure the output current.
Load is too heavy. • Decrease the load.
• Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
• Replace the cooling fan.
Internal cooling fan is stopped. • After replacing the drive, reset the cooling fan maintenance parameter (o4-03
= “0”).
Overheat 1 (Heatsink Overheat) 5
oH1 The temperature of the heatsink has exceeded 10 °C plus the default value of
L8-02.
5.2 Fault Detection
• Check the temperature surrounding the drive.

Surrounding temperature is too • Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel.
high. • Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area.
• Remove anything near the drive that might be producing excessive heat.
• Measure the output current.
Load is too heavy. • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
• Reduce the load.
The internal cooling fan has • Check the maintenance time for the cooling fan (U4-04).
reached its performance life or has • If U4-04 exceeds 90%, replace the cooling fan.
malfunctioned. • After replacing fan, reset the fan maintenance time (o4-03 = “0”).
Current flowing to control circuit • Check the current level of the terminal.
terminal +V exceeded the tolerance
level. • Set the current to the control circuit terminal to be 20 mA or less.

Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC Input)
oH3 • The motor overheat signal to analog input terminal A1 or A2 exceeded the
alarm detection level.
• Detection requires multi-function analog input H3-02 or H3-10 be set to “E”.
• Check the size of the load, the accel/decel times and the cycle times.
• Decrease the load.
• Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
• Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10). This will mainly involve
reducing E1-08 and E1-10.
Motor has overheated • Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 excessively, as this reduces load
tolerance at low speeds.
• Check the motor-rated current.
• Enter the motor-rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate (E2-01).
• Ensure the motor cooling system is operating normally.
• Repair or replace the motor cooling system.
Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input)
oH4 • The motor overheat signal to analog input terminal A1 or A2 exceeded the
fault detection level.
• Detection requires that multi-function analog input H3-02 or H3-10 = “E”.
5.2 Fault Detection
• Check the size of the load, the accel/decel times and the cycle times.
• Decrease the load.
• Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
reducing E1-08 and E1-10. Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10
Motor has overheated. excessively because this reduces load tolerance at low speeds
• Check the motor-rated current.
• Enter the motor-rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate (E2-01).
• Ensure the motor cooling system is operating normally.
• Repair or replace the motor cooling system.
Motor Overload
oL1 The electrothermal sensor tripped overload protection.
Note: The U4-16 value must be less than 100 before oL1 can be reset.
Cycle times are too short during Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
acceleration and deceleration.
• Drive overloaded at low
speeds. • Reduce the load.
• Overload may occur at low • Increase the speed.
speeds when using a general-
purpose motor, even if • If the drive is supposed to operate at low speeds, either increase the motor
operating within the rated capacity or use a motor specifically designed to operate with the drive.
current limitation.
Although a special type of motor is
being used, the motor protection Set L1-01 = “2”.
selection is set for a general-
purpose motor (L1-01 = 1).
Troubleshooting
• Adjust the user set V/f patterns (E1-04 through E1-10). Parameters E1-08 and
Voltage is too high for the V/f E1-10 may need to be reduced.
characteristics. • If E1-08 and E1-10 are set too high, there may be very little load tolerance at
low speed.
The wrong motor-rated current is • Check the motor-rated current.
set to E2-01. • Enter the value written on the motor nameplate to parameter E2-01.
The motor base frequency for the • Check the rated frequency indicated on the motor nameplate.
drive input power is set too low. • Enter the rated frequency to E1-06 (Base Frequency).
Multiple motors are running off the Disable the Motor Protection function (L1-01 = “0”) and install a thermal relay
5
same drive. to each motor.
The electrical thermal protection • Check the motor characteristics.

characteristics and motor overload • Correct the value set to L1-01 (Motor Protection Function).
characteristics do not match. • Install an external thermal relay.
5.2 Fault Detection
The electrical thermal relay is • Check the current rating listed on the motor nameplate.
operating at the wrong level. • Check the value set for the motor-rated current (E2-01).
• Overexcitation increases the motor losses and the motor temperature. If applied
too long, motor damage can occur. Prevent excessive overexcitation operation
Motor overheated by or apply proper cooling to the motor
overexcitation operation. • Reduce the excitation deceleration gain (n3-13).
• Set L3-04 (Stall Prevention during Deceleration) to a value other than 4.
• Check values set to Speed Search related parameters.
Speed Search related parameters • Adjust the Speed Search current and Speed Search deceleration times (b3-02
are not set to the proper values. and b3-03 respectively).
• After Auto-Tuning, enable Speed Estimation Type Search (b3-24 = “1”).
Output current fluctuation due to Check the power supply for phase loss.
input phase loss
Drive Overload
oL2
The thermal sensor of the drive triggered overload protection.
Cycle times are too short during Increase the settings for the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through
acceleration and deceleration. C1-08).
Voltage is too high for the V/f reducing E1-08 and E1-10.
characteristics. • Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 excessively because this reduces load
tolerance at low speeds.
Drive capacity is too small. Replace the drive with a larger model.
• Reduce the load when operating at low speeds.
Overload occurred when operating • Replace the drive with a model that is one frame size larger.
at low speeds.
• Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss but less
Excessive torque compensation. current.
• Check the settings for all Speed Search related parameters.
• Adjust the current used during Speed Search and the Speed Search deceleration
Speed Search related parameters time (b3-03 and b3-02 respectively).
are not set correctly.
• After Auto-Tuning the drive, enable the Speed Search Estimation Type (b3-24
= “1”).
Output current fluctuation due to Check the power supply for phase loss.
input phase loss
Overtorque Detection 1
oL3 The current has exceeded the value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer
than the allowable time (L6-03).
5.2 Fault Detection
Parameter settings are not Check the settings of parameters L6-02 and L6-03.
appropriate for the type of load.
There is a fault on the machine side Check the status of the load. Remove the cause of the fault.
(e.g., the machine is locked up).
Overtorque Detection 2
oL4 The current has exceeded the value set for Overtorque Detection 2 (L6-05) for
longer than the allowable time (L6-06).
Mechanical Weakening Detection 1
oL5
Overtorque occurred, matching the conditions specified in L6-08.
Overtorque occurred, triggering the
mechanical weakening level set to Check for the cause of mechanical weakening.
L6-08.
High-Slip Braking oL
oL7 The output frequency stayed constant for longer than the time set in n3-04 during
High-slip Braking.
Excessive load inertia.
• Reduce deceleration times using parameters C1-02, -04, -06 and -08 in
Motor is driven by the load. applications that do not use High-slip Braking.
Something on the load side is • Use a braking resistor to shorten deceleration time.
restricting deceleration.
Troubleshooting
• Increase parameter n3-04 (High-slip Braking Overload Time).
The overload time during High-slip
Braking is too short. • Install a thermal relay and increase the parameter setting of n3-04 to the
maximum value.
External Digital Operator Connection Fault
• The external operator has been disconnected from the drive.
Note: An oPr fault will occur when all of the following conditions are true:
oPr
• Output is interrupted when the operator is disconnected (o2-06 = 1).
• The run command is assigned to the operator
5
(b1-02 = 0 and LOCAL has been selected).
5.2 Fault Detection
• Check the connection between the operator and the drive.

External operator is not properly • Replace the cable if damaged.
connected to the drive. • Turn off the drive input power and disconnect the operator. Next reconnect the
operator and turn the drive input power back on.
Overspeed (Simple V/f with PG)
oS
Pulse input (RP) indicates that motor speed feedback exceeded F1-08 setting.
• Adjust the gain by using the pulse train input parameters (H6-02 through
Overshoot or undershoot is H6-05).
occurring. • Increase the settings for C5-01 (Speed Control Proportional Gain 1) and reduce
C5-02 (Speed Control Integral Time 1).
Set the H6-02 (Pulse Train Input Scaling) = 100%, the frequency of the PG pulses
Incorrect PG pulse settings. at maximum motor speed.
Check the setting for the overspeed detection level and the overspeed detection
Inappropriate parameter settings. time (F1-08 and F1-09).
Overvoltage
Voltage in the DC bus has exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
ov
• For 200 V class: approximately 410 V
• For 400 V class: approximately 820 V (740 V when E1-01 is less than 400)
• Increase the deceleration time (C1-02, -04, -06, -08).
Deceleration time is too short and • Install a braking resistor or a dynamic braking resistor unit.
regenerative energy flows from the
motor into the drive. • Enable stall prevention during deceleration (L3-04 = “1”).
Stall prevention is enabled as the default setting.
Fast acceleration time causes the • Check if sudden drive acceleration triggers an overvoltage alarm.
motor to overshoot the speed • Increase the acceleration time.
reference. • Use longer S-curve acceleration and deceleration times.
The braking torque was too high, causing regenerative energy to charge the DC
Excessive braking load. bus.
Reduce the braking torque, use a braking option, or lengthen decel time.
Install a DC link choke.
Surge voltage entering from the Note: Voltage surge can result from thyristor convertor and phase advancing
drive input power. capacitor using same drive main input power supply.
Ground fault in the output circuit • Check the motor wiring for ground faults.
causing the DC bus capacitor to
overcharge. • Correct grounding shorts and turn the power back on.
5.2 Fault Detection
• Check the settings for Speed Search related parameters.

• Enable Speed Search Retry function
Improper Setting of Speed Search (b3-19 greater than or equal to 1 to 10).
related parameters. (Includes
Speed Search after a momentary • Adjust the current level during Speed Search and the deceleration time (b3-02
power loss and after a fault restart.) and b3-03 respectively).
• Perform Line-to-Line Resistance Auto-Tuning and then enable Speed
Estimation Type Speed Search (b3-24 = 1).
Excessive regeneration when • Enable the Overvoltage Suppression function (L3-11 = 1).
overshoot occurs after acceleration. • Lengthen the S-curve at acceleration end.
Drive input power voltage is too • Check the voltage.

high. • Lower drive input power voltage within the limits listed in the specifications.
The dynamic braking transistor is Replace the drive.
damaged.
The braking transistor is wired • Check braking transistor wiring for errors.
incorrectly. • Properly rewire the braking resistor device.
• Review the list of possible solutions provided for controlling noise.
Drive fails to operate properly due
to noise interference. • Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit
lines, main circuit lines and ground wiring.
• Check the load inertia settings when using KEB, overvoltage suppression or
Load inertia has been set Stall Prevention during deceleration.
incorrectly.
• Adjust L3-25 (Load Inertia Ratio) in accordance with the load.
Braking function is being used in Connect a braking resistor.
PM Open Loop Vector Control.
• Adjust the parameters that control hunting.
• Set the hunting prevention gain (n1-02).
Motor hunting occurs. • Adjust the AFR time constant 1 (n2-02) and the AFR time constant 2 (n2-03)
when in OLV Control.
• Use parameters n8-45 (PM Speed Feedback Detection Suppression Gain)
and n8-47 (Pull-In Current Compensation Time Constant).
Troubleshooting
Input Phase Loss
PF Drive input power has an open phase or has a large imbalance of voltage between
phases. Detected when L8-05 = 1 (enabled).
There is phase loss in the drive • Check for wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power.
input power. • Correct the wiring.
There is loose wiring in the drive

• Ensure the terminals are tightened properly. 5
input power terminals. • Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals.
Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques on page 61 for details.
5.2 Fault Detection
• Check the voltage from the drive input power.

There is excessive fluctuation in the • Review the possible solutions for stabilizing the drive input power.
drive input power voltage. • Disable Input Phase Loss Detection (L8-05 = “0”). PF is detected if DC bus
ripple is too high. If it is disabled, there is no fault but the ripple is still too
high, thereby the capacitors are stressed more and lose lifetime.
There is poor balance between • Stabilize drive input power or disable phase loss detection.
voltage phases.
• Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05).
• Replace the drive if U4-05 is greater than 90%.
• Check for anything wrong with the drive input power.
The main circuit capacitors are • If nothing is wrong with the drive input power, try the following solutions if
worn. the alarm continues:
• Disable Input Phase Loss Protection selection (L8-05 = “0”). PF is detected if
DC bus ripple is too high. If it is disabled, there is no fault but the ripple is still
too high, thereby the capacitors are stressed more and lose lifetime.
• Replace the drive.
PG Disconnect (for Simple V/f with PG)
PGo
No PG pulses are received for longer than the time set to F1-14.
Pulse input (RP) is disconnected. Reconnect the pulse input (RP).
Pulse input (RP) wiring is wrong. Correct the wiring.
Motor brake engaged. Ensure the motor brake releases properly.
Braking Resistor Overheat
rH Braking resistor protection was triggered.
Fault detection is enabled when L8-01 = 1 (disabled as a default).
• Check the load, deceleration time and speed.
Deceleration time is too short and • Reduce the load.
excessive regenerative energy is • Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
flowing back into the drive.
• Replace the braking option with a larger device that can handle the power that
is discharged.
Recalculate braking load and braking power. Then try reducing the braking load
Excessive braking inertia. and checking the braking resistor settings and improve braking capacity.
The proper braking resistor has not • Check the specifications and conditions for the braking resistor device.
been installed. • Select the optimal braking resistor.
Note: The magnitude of the braking load trips the braking resistor overheat alarm, NOT the surface temperature. Using
the braking resistor more frequently than its rating trips the alarm even when the braking resistor surface is not very
hot.
5.2 Fault Detection

Dynamic Braking Transistor
rr
The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed.
The braking transistor is damaged. • Cycle power to the drive and check if the fault reoccurs. Refer to Diagnosing
and Resetting Faults on page 159.
The control circuit is damaged. • Replace the drive if the fault continues.
SC IGBT Short Circuit
IGBT fault • Check motor wiring
• Cycle power to the drive.
IGBT short circuit detection and
circuit fault • If the problem continues, contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest
Yaskawa sales office.
Too Many Speed Search Restarts
SEr
The number of speed search restarts exceeded the number set to b3-19.
• Reduce the detection compensation gain during Speed Search (b3-10).
Speed Search parameters are set to • Increase the current level when attempting Speed Search (b3-17).
the wrong values. • Increase the detection time during Speed Search (b3-18).
• Repeat Auto-Tuning.
The motor is coasting in the
opposite direction of the run Enable Bi-directional Speed Search (b3-14 = “1”).
command.
Troubleshooting
Motor Pull Out or Step Out Detection
STo
Motor pull out or step out has occurred. Motor has exceeded its pull out torque.
• Enter the correct motor code for the PM being used into E5-01.
The wrong motor code has been set
(Yaskawa motors only). • For special-purpose motors, enter the correct data to all E5 parameters
according to the Test Report provided for the motor.
• Increase the value set to n8-55 (Load Inertia for PM).
Load is too heavy.

• Increase the value set to n8-51 (Pull-In Current during Accel/Decel for PM). 5
• Reduce the load.
• Increase the motor or drive capacity.
Load inertia is too heavy. Increase n8-55 (Load Inertia for PM).
Acceleration and deceleration • Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).
times are too short. • Increase the S-curve acceleration and deceleration times (C2-01).
5.2 Fault Detection

Undertorque Detection 1
UL3 The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-02)
for longer than the allowable time (L6-03).
There is a fault on the machine side. Check the load for any problems.
UL4 The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-05)
for longer than the allowable time (L6-06).
There is a fault on the machine side. Check the load for any problems.
UL5
The operation conditions matched the conditions set to L6-08.
Undertorque was detected and
matched the condition of Check the load side for any problems.
mechanical loss detection
operation selection (L6-08).
DC Bus Undervoltage
One of the following conditions occurred while the drive was in operation:
• Voltage in the DC bus fell below the undervoltage detection level (L2-05).
Uv1
• For 200 V class: approximately 190 V (160 V for single phase drives)
• For 400 V class: approximately 380 V (350 V when E1-01 is less than 400)
The fault is output only if L2-01 = 0 or L2-01 = 1 and the DC bus voltage is
under L2-05 for longer than L2-02.
• The main circuit drive input power is wired incorrectly.
Input power phase loss.
• Correct the wiring.
• Ensure there are no loose terminals.
One of the drive input power wiring
terminals is loose. • Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals.
Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques on page 61 for details.
There is a problem with the voltage • Check the voltage.
from the drive input power. • Correct the voltage to within range listed in drive input power specifications.
The power has been interrupted. Correct the drive input power.
5.2 Fault Detection
Drive internal circuitry has become • Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05).
worn. • Replace the drive if U4-05 exceeds 90%.
The drive input power transformer
is not large enough and voltage Check the capacity of the drive input power transformer.
drops after switching on power.
Air inside the drive is too hot. Check the drive internal temperature.
Problem with the CHARGE Replace the drive.
indicator.
Control Power Supply Voltage Fault
Uv2
Voltage is too low for the control drive input power.
L2-02 changed from its default
value in drive that is 7.5 kW or Correct parameter L2-02 setting or install optional Momentary Power Loss Ride-
smaller without installing a Thru unit.
Momentary Power Loss Ride-
Thru.
The wiring for the control power • Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs.
supply is damaged. • Replace the drive if the fault continues to occur.
• Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs.
Internal circuitry is damaged.
• Replace the drive if the fault continues to occur.
Undervoltage 3 (Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault)
Uv3
The inrush prevention circuit has failed.
• Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs.
The contactor on the inrush • Replace the drive if the fault continues to occur.
prevention circuit is damaged. • Check monitor U4-06 for the performance life of the inrush prevention circuit.
Troubleshooting
• Replace the drive if U4-06 exceeds 90%.
5.3 Alarm Detection
5.3 Alarm Detection

u Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Table 5.3 Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
LED Operator Display Minor Fault Name
Station Address Setting Error (CC-Link, CANopen, MECHATROLINK)
AEr
Option card node address is outside the acceptable setting range.
Baseblock
bb
Drive output interrupted as indicated by an external baseblock signal.
Option Communication Error
bUS • After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.
• Assign a Run command frequency reference to the option card.
Serial Communication Transmission Error
CALL
Communication has not yet been established.
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error
CE
Control data was not received correctly for two seconds.
CrST Can Not Reset
MECHATROLINK Comm. Cycle Setting Error
CyC
Comm. Cycle Setting Error was detected.
Speed Deviation (for Simple V/f with PG)
dEv According to the pulse input (RP), the speed deviation is greater than the setting in
F1-10 for a time longer than the setting in F1-11.
dnE Drive Disabled
E5 MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Error

Forward/Reverse Run Command Input Error
EF
Both forward run and reverse run closed simultaneously for over 0.5 s.
Option Card External Fault
EF0
An external fault condition is present.
External fault (input terminal S1)
EF1
EF2
EF3
5.3 Alarm Detection

EF4
EF5
EF6
EF7
Excessive PID Feedback
FbH The PID feedback input is higher than the level set in b5-36 for longer than the time
set in b5-37, and b5-12 is set to 1 or 4.
PID Feedback Loss
FbL The PID feedback input is lower than the level set in b5-13 for longer than the time
set in b5-14, and b5-12 is set to 1 or 4.
Safe Disable Signal Input
Hbb
The Safe Disable Input channel is open.
Safe Disable Signal Input
HbbF
The safe disable input hardware is defective.
Current Alarm
HCA
Drive current exceeded overcurrent warning level (150% of the rated current).
Cooling Fan Maintenance Time
LT-1 The cooling fan has reached its expected maintenance period and may need to be
replaced.
Note: An alarm output (H2- = 10) will only be triggered if H2- = 2F.
Capacitor Maintenance Time
LT-2 The main circuit and control circuit capacitors are nearing the end of their expected
Troubleshooting
performance life.
Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance Time
LT-3 The DC bus soft charge relay is nearing the end of its expected performance life.
IGBT Maintenance Time (50%)
LT-4 IGBTs have reached 50% of their expected performance life.
Heatsink Overheat
5
oH
The temperature exceeded the value set to L8-02.
Drive Overheat Warning
oH2 “Drive Overheat Warning” was input to a multi-function input terminal, S1 through
S7 (H1-= B)
5.3 Alarm Detection
Motor Overheat
oH3 The motor overheat signal entered to a multi-function analog input terminal exceeded
the alarm level (H3-02 or H3-10 = E).
Overtorque 1
oL3 Drive output current (or torque in OLV) was greater than L6-02 for longer than the
time set in L6-03.
Overtorque 2
oL4 Drive output current (or torque in OLV) was greater than L6-05 for longer than the
time set in L6-06.
oL5
Overtorque occurred, matching the conditions specified in L6-08.
Overspeed (for Simple V/f with PG)
oS
Pulse input (RP) indicates that motor speed feedback exceeded F1-08 setting.
DC Bus Overvoltage
ov The DC bus voltage exceeded the trip point.
For 200 V class: approximately 410 V
For 400 V class: approximately 820 V (740 V when E1-01 < 400)
PASS MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. Test Mode Complete
PG Disconnect (for Simple V/f with PG)
PGo
Detected when no PG pulses received for a time longer than setting in F1-14.
Motor Switch during Run
rUn
A command to switch motors was entered during run.
SE MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Test Mode Error
IGBT Maintenance Time (90%)
TrPC
IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected performance life.
UL3
Drive output current (or torque in OLV) less than L6-02 for longer than L6-03 time.
UL4
Drive output current (or torque in OLV) less than L6-05 for longer than L6-06 time.
Undervoltage
One of the following conditions was true when the drive was stopped and a run
command was entered:
Uv • DC bus voltage dropped below the level specified in L2-05.
• Contactor to suppress inrush current in the drive was open.
• Low voltage in the control drive input power. This alarm outputs only if L2-01 is
not 0 and DC bus voltage is under L2-05.
5.4 Operator Programming Errors
5.4 Operator Programming Errors

An Operator Programming Error (oPE) occurs when an inappropriate parameter is set or an
individual parameter setting is inappropriate.
u oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Table 5.4 oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
LED Operator Display Error Name
Drive Capacity Setting Fault
oPE01
Drive capacity and the value set to o2-04 do not match.
Parameter Range Setting Error
oPE02
Use U1-18 to find parameters set outside the range.
Multi-Function Input Selection Error
oPE03 A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function
contact inputs H1-01 to H1-07.
oPE04 Initialization required.
Run Command/Frequency Reference Source Selection
oPE05 Error
Multi-Function Analog Input Selection Error
oPE07 A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function
analog inputs H3-02 through to H3-10 and PID functions
conflict.
Parameter Selection Error
oPE08 A function has been set that cannot be used in the motor
control method selected.
Troubleshooting
PID Control Selection Fault
oPE09 PID control function selection is incorrect. Requires that
PID control is enabled (b5-01 = 1 to 4).
V/f Data Setting Error
One or more of the parameters listed below are not set
oPE10 according to the formula:
• E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ E1-11 ≤ E1-04
• E3-09 ≤ E3-07 < E3-06 ≤ E3-11 ≤ E3-04
Carrier Frequency Setting Error 5
oPE11
Correct the setting for the carrier frequency.
Pulse Monitor Selection Error
oPE13 Incorrect setting of monitor selection for Pulse Train
(H6-06).
5.5 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection

Auto-Tuning faults are shown below. When the following faults are detected, the fault is
displayed on the digital operator and the motor coasts to a stop. No fault or alarm outputs will
occur
u Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Table 5.5 Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
End1 Excessive V/f Setting. Displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete.
Cause Possible Solutions
The torque reference exceeded • Before Auto-Tuning the drive, verify the information written on the motor
20% during Auto-Tuning. nameplate and enter that data to T1-03 through T1-05.
The no-load current exceeded • Enter proper information to parameters T1-03 to T1-05 and repeat Auto-Tuning.
80% of the drive rated current
during Auto-Tuning. • If possible, disconnect the motor from the load and perform Auto-Tuning.

Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient. Detected only during Rotational
End2 Auto-Tuning and displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete.
Motor data entered during • Enter the correct data.
Auto-Tuning was incorrect. • Restart Auto-Tuning and enter the correct information.
Auto-Tuning calculated values
outside the parameter setting • Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
range, assigning the iron-core
saturation coefficient (E2-07, • Disconnect the motor from machine and perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
E2-08) a temporary value.
End3 Rated Current Setting Alarm (displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete)
• The motor line-to-line
resistance and the
motor-rated current are not
consistent with one another. • Check the setting of parameter T1-04.
• Check the motor data and repeat Auto-Tuning.
• The correct current rating
printed on the nameplate was
not entered into T1-04.
Er-01 Motor Data Error

Motor output and motor-rated • Check the drive and motor capacities.
current settings (T1-02 and
T1-04) do not match. • Correct the settings of parameters T1-02 and T1-04.
Motor output and no-load current
settings (T1-04 and E2-03) do • Check the motor-rated current and no-load current.
not match. Data required when
Auto-Tuning for OLV Control or • Correct the settings of parameters T1-04 and E2-03.
Stationary Auto-Tuning.
Base frequency and base motor
rotations (T1-05 and T1-07) do Set T1-05 and T1-07 to the correct value.
not match.
Er-02 Minor Fault
The wiring is faulty. • Check the wiring and correct defective connections.
• Check around the machine.
Load is too heavy.
• Check the load.
Er-03 STOP Button Input
Auto-Tuning canceled by Auto-Tuning did not complete properly and will have to be performed again.
pressing STOP button.
Er-04 Line-to-Line Resistance Error
Troubleshooting
Auto-Tuning did not complete
within designated time frame. • Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
Drive-calculated values outside • Disconnect the motor from machine and perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
parameter setting range.
Er-05 No-Load Current Error
5

within designated time frame. • Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
Drive-calculated values outside • Disconnect the motor from machine and perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
parameter setting range.
Er-08 Rated Slip Error
within designated time frame.
• Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
Values calculated by the drive • Disconnect the motor from machine and perform Auto-Tuning.
are outside the allowable
parameter setting ranges.
Er-09 Acceleration Error (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning)
The motor did not accelerate for • Increase the acceleration time (C1-01).
the specified acceleration time. • Check if it is possible to disconnect the machine from the motor.
Torque limit when motoring is • Check the settings of parameters L7-01 and L7-02.
too low (L7-01 and L7-02). • Increase the setting.
Er-11 Motor Speed Fault (detected only when Auto-Tuning is enabled)
Torque reference is too high. • Increase the acceleration time (C1-01).
(Enabled in OLV only.) • Disconnect the machine from the motor, if possible.
Er-12 Current Detection Error
One of the motor phases is Check motor wiring and correct problems.
missing (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).
Current exceeded the current • Check the motor wiring for a short between motor lines.
rating of the drive. • If a magnetic contactor is used between motors, ensure it is on.
The current is too low. • Replace the drive.
Attempted Auto-Tuning without Connect the motor and perform Auto-Tuning.
motor connected to the drive.
Current detection signal error. Replace the drive.
5.6 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults

When a fault occurs and the drive stops, follow the instructions below to remove whatever
conditions triggered the fault, then restart the drive.
u Fault Reset Methods

After the Fault Occurs Procedure
Fix the cause of the fault,

restart the drive, and reset the
fault Press on the digital operator.
STOP
Drive
Fix the cause of the fault and Close then open the fault signal digital Fault Reset Switch
S4 Fault Reset Digital Input
reset via Fault Reset Digital input via terminal S4. S4 is set fault
Input S4. reset as default (H1-04 = 12) SC Digital Input Common
2 ON
If the above methods do not reset the fault, turn off the drive main
power supply. Reapply power after LED operator display is out.
1 OFF
Troubleshooting
Appendix: A
Specifications
A.1 HEAVY DUTY AND NORMAL DUTY RATINGS 162

A.2 SINGLE/THREE-PHASE 200 V CLASS
DRIVES...........................................................163
A.3 THREE-PHASE 400 V CLASS DRIVES............ 166
A.4 DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS................................ 168
A.1 Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings
A.1 Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings

The capacity of the drive is based on two types of load characteristics: Heavy Duty (HD) and
Normal Duty (ND).
Refer to Selecting the Appropriate Load Rating on page 162 for the differences between
HD and ND. Specifications for capacity ratings are listed on the following pages.
Table A.1 Selecting the Appropriate Load Rating
Setting Default Carrier
Parameter Rated Output Current Overload Tolerance Frequency
C6-01
HD Rating 8/10 kHz
0: Heavy Duty 150% rated output current for 60 s
varies by model <1> varies by model
1: Normal Duty ND Rating 120% rated output current for 60 s 2 kHz, Swing PWM
(default) varies by model <1> varies by model
<1> The following pages list information on rating changes based on drive model.
TERMS
• HD and ND: HD refers to applications requiring constant torque output,
while ND refers to applications with variable torque needs. The drive allows
the user to select HD or ND torque depending on the application. Fans,
pumps, and blowers should use ND (C6-01 = 1), and other applications
generally use HD (C6-01 = 0).
• Swing PWM: Swing PWM equivalent to a 2 kHz audible noise. This
function turns the motor noise into a less obtrusive white noise.
Note: Differences between HD ratings and ND ratings for the drive include rated input and output current,
overload capacity, carrier frequency, and current limit. The default setting is for ND (C6-01 = 1).
A.2 Single/Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives

Note: Differences between Heavy Duty (HD) ratings and Normal Duty (ND) ratings for the drive include rated
input and output current, overload capacity, carrier frequency and current limit. Set parameter C6-01 to
0 for HD or 1 for ND (default).
Table A.2 Power Ratings

Item Specification
Three-Phase Drive Model 2A0001 2A0002 2A0004 2A0006 2A0010 2A0012 2A0020
Single-Phase Drive Model <1> BA0001 BA0002 BA0003 BA0006 BA0010 BA0012 BA0018
0.5/ 1.0/ 2.0/ 5.0

ND Rating 0.13 0.25 3.0
Maximum Motor Size Allowed 0.75 1.5 3.0 <2>
(HP) <3> 0.75/ 1.5/
HD Rating 0.13 0.25 0.5 3.0 5.0
1.0 2.0
ND Rating 1.1 1.9 3.9 7.3 10.8 13.9 24.0

Three- <2>
Input phase
Input Current HD Rating 0.7 1.5 2.9 5.8 7.5 11.0 18.9
(A) <4> ND Rating 2.0 3.6 7.3 13.8 20.2 24.0 –
Single-
phase HD Rating 1.4 2.8 5.5 11.0 14.1 20.6 35.0
Rated Output ND Rating 0.5 0.7 1.3 2.3 3.7 4.6 7.5
Capacity (kVA) <2>
<5> HD Rating 0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.7
ND Rating 3.5 19.6
1.2 1.9 6.0 9.6 12.0
<6> (3.3) <2>
Output Current (A)
3.0 8.0 11.0 17.5
HD Rating 0.8 <7> 1.6 <7> 5.0 <7>
<7> <8> <8> <8>
Output ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 1 minute
HD Rating: 150% of rated output current for 1 minute
Overload Tolerance (Derating may be required for applications that start and stop
frequently)
Carrier Frequency User-adjustable 2 to 15 kHz
Specifications
Three-phase power: 200 to 240 V
Max Output Voltage (V) Single-phase power: 200 to 240 V
(both proportional to input voltage)
Max Output Frequency (Hz) 400 Hz (user-adjustable)
Three-phase power: 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
Rated Voltage Single-phase power: 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
Rated Frequency
Power DC power supply: 270 to 340 V <9>
Supply
Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -15 to 10% A
Allowable Frequency Fluctuation ±5%
Item Specification
Three-Phase Drive Model 2A0001 2A0002 2A0004 2A0006 2A0010 2A0012 2A0020
Single-Phase Drive Model <1> BA0001 BA0002 BA0003 BA0006 BA0010 BA0012 BA0018
Harmonic Corrective DC Link Choke Optional

Actions
<1> Drives with single-phase power supply input will output three-phase power and cannot run a single-phase motor.
<2> 2A0020 only. BA0018 is available with a Heavy Duty rating only.
<3> The motor capacity (HP) refers to a NEC rated 4-pole motor. The rated output current of the drive output amps
should be equal to or greater than the motor rated current.
<4> Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring connections, and
power supply impedance.
<5> Rated motor capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 230 V.
<6> Carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz (Swing PWM). Current derating is required in order to raise the carrier
frequency.
<7> Carrier frequency is set to 10 kHz. Current derating is required in order to raise the carrier frequency.
<9> DC is not available for UL standards.
Table A.3 Power Ratings Continued

Item Specification
Three-Phase Model 2A0030 2A0040 2A0056 2A0069
Single-Phase Model <1> - - - -
Maximum Motor Size Allowed (HP) ND Rating 7.5/10.0 10.0 20.0 25.0
<2> HD Rating 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0
Three- ND Rating 37.0 52.0 68.0 80.0
Input Current Phase HD Rating 24.0 37.0 52.0 68.0
Input
(A) <3> Single- ND Rating - - - -
Phase HD Rating - - - -
Rated Output Capacity ND Rating 11.4 15.2 21.3 26.3
(kVA) <4> HD Rating 9.5 12.6 17.9 22.9
ND Rating <5> 30.0 40.0 56.0 69.0
Output Current (A)
HD Rating 25.0 <6> 33.0 <6> 47. 0 <6> 60.0 <6>
ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 1 minute
Output HD Rating: 150% of rated output current for 1 minute
Overload Tolerance (Derating may be required for applications that start and
stop frequently)
Three-phase power: 200 to 240 V
Max Output Voltage (V) Single-phase power: 200 to 240 V
(both proportional to input voltage)
Three-phase power: 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
Rated Voltage Single-phase power: 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
Rated Frequency
Power DC power supply: 270 to 340 V <7>
Supply
Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -15 to 10%
Actions
Specifications
<1> Drives with single-phase power supply input will output three-phase power and cannot run a single-phase motor.
<2> The motor capacity (HP) refers to a NEC rated 4-pole motor. The rated output current of the drive output amps
should be equal to or greater than the motor rated current.
<3> Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring connections, and
<5> Carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz (Swing PWM). Current derating is required in order to raise the carrier A
frequency.
A.3 Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives

Note: Differences between Heavy Duty (HD) ratings and Normal Duty (ND) ratings for the drive include rated
input and output current, overload capacity, carrier frequency and current limit. Set parameter C6-01 to
0 for HD or 1 for ND (default).
Table A.4 Power Ratings

Item Specification
Three-Phase Model 4A0001 4A0002 4A0004 4A0005 4A0007 4A0009
Maximum Applicable ND Rating 0.5 0.75/1.0 1.5/2.0 3.0 3.0 5.0
Motor Capacity (HP)
<1> HD Rating 0.5 0.75 1.0/1.5/2.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
Input ND Rating 1.2 2.1 4.3 5.9 8.1 9.4
Input Current (A)
<2> HD Rating 1.2 1.8 3.2 4.4 6.0 8.2
Output ND Rating <4> 0.9 1.6 3.1 4.1 5.3 6.7
Current
(kVA) <3> HD Rating <5> 0.9 1.4 2.6 3.7 4.2 5.5
Output ND Rating <4> 1.2 2.1 4.1 5.4 6.9 8.8

Current (A)
HD Rating <5> 1.2 1.8 3.4 4.8 5.5 7.2
Output ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 60 s
Overload Tolerance HD Rating: 150% of rated output current for 60 s
(Derating may be required for applications that start and stop frequently)
Max Output Voltage (V) Three-phase power: 380 to 480 V (proportional to input voltage)
Rated Voltage Three-phase power: 380 to 480 V 50/60 Hz
Rated Frequency DC power supply: 510 to 680 V <6>
Power
Supply Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -15 to 10%
Allowable Frequency ±5%
Fluctuation
Actions
<1> The motor capacity (HP) refers to a NEC 4-pole motor. The rated output current of the drive output amps should
be equal to or greater than the motor rated current.
<2> Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring conditions, and
<4> Carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz (Swing PWM). Current derating is required to raise the carrier frequency.
<5> Carrier frequency is set to 8 kHz. Current derating is required to raise the carrier frequency.
Table A.5 Power Ratings Continued

Item Specification
Three-Phase Model 4A0011 4A0018 4A0023 4A0031 4A0038
Maximum Applicable Motor ND Rating 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0
Capacity (HP) <1> HD Rating 5.0 10.0 10.0 15.0 20.0
Input Current (A) ND Rating 14.0 20.0 24.0 38.0 44.0

Input
<2> HD Rating 10.4 15.0 20.0 29.0 39.0
ND Rating 8.5 13.3 17.5 23.6 29.0
Output Current (kVA) <4>
<3> HD Rating 7.0 11.3 13.7 18.3 23.6
<5>
ND Rating 11.1 17.5 23.0 31.0 38.0
<4>
Output Current (A)
HD Rating 9.2 14.8 18.0 24.0 31.0
Output <5>
ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 60 s
HD Rating: 150% of rated output current for 60 s
Overload Tolerance (Derating may be required for applications that start and stop
frequently)
Max Output Voltage (V) Three-phase power: 380 to 480 V (proportional to input voltage)
Rated Voltage Three-phase power: 380 to 480 V 50/60 Hz
Power
Rated Frequency DC power supply: 510 to 680 V <6>
Supply Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -15 to 10%
Harmonic Corrective Actions DC Link Choke Optional
<1> The motor capacity (HP) refers to a NEC 4-pole motor. The rated output current of the drive output amps should
be equal to or greater than the motor rated current.
<2> Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring conditions, and
Specifications
<4> Carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz (Swing PWM). Current derating is required to raise the carrier frequency.
<5> Carrier frequency is set to 8 kHz. Current derating is required to raise the carrier frequency.
A.4 Drive Specifications

Note: 1. Perform rotational Auto-Tuning to obtain OLV performance specifications.
2. For optimum performance life of the drive, install the drive in an environment that meets the
environmental conditions.
Item Specification
The following control methods are available:
Control Method Open Loop Vector Control (current vector), V/f Control, and PM Open
Loop Vector (for use with SPM and IPM)
Frequency Control Range 0.01 to 400 Hz
Digital input: within ±0.01% of the max output frequency
Frequency Accuracy
(-10 to +50 °C)
Analog input: within ±0.5% of the max output frequency
(25 °C ±10 °C)
Frequency Setting Resolution

Digital inputs: 0.01 Hz
Analog inputs: 1/1000 of maximum output frequency
Output Frequency Calculation
Resolution 1/220 x Maximum output frequency (E1-04)
Main frequency reference: 0 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ), 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω),

Frequency Setting Signal 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
Main speed reference: Pulse Train Input (max 32 kHz)
Control 200%/0.5 Hz (OLV Control, HD rating, IM of 3.7 kW or smaller),
Character- Starting Torque
50%/6 Hz (OLV/PM Control)
istics
Speed Control Range 1:100 (OLV Control), 1:40 (V/f Control), 1:10 (OLV/PM Control)
Speed Control Accuracy ±0.2% in Open Loop Vector Control <1>
5 Hz (25 °C ±10 °C) in Open Loop Vector Control
Speed Response (excludes temperature fluctuation when performing Rotational Auto-
Tuning)
Torque Limit Open Loop Vector Control only. Adjustable in 4 quadrants.
Accel/Decel Time 0.00 to 6000.0 s (allows four separate settings for accel and decel)
Instantaneous Average Decel Torque <2> : 0.1/0.2 kW: over 150%,
0.4/0.75 kW: over 100%, 1.5 kW: over 50%, 2.2 kW and above: over
Braking Torque
20%
Continuous Regen Torque: 20%,
125% with a Braking Resistor Unit <3> : (10% ED) 10 s with an internal
braking resistor.
V/f Characteristics Preset V/f patterns and user-set program available.
Item Specification
Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru
Speed Search
Over/Undertorque Detection
Torque Limit, Multi-Step Speed (17 steps max)
Accel/Decel Time Switch
S-Curve Accel/Decel,
2-Wire/3-Wire Sequence
Rotational Auto-Tuning
Stationary Auto-Tuning of Line-to-Line Resistance
Dwell
Control
Cooling Fan ON/OFF
Character- Functions
Slip Compensation
istics
Torque Compensation
Jump Frequencies (reference dead band)
Frequency Reference Upper/Lower Limit
DC Injection Braking (start and stop), High Slip Braking
PID Control (with Sleep Function)
Energy Saving
MEMOBUS/Modbus (RS-485/RS-422 Max 115.2 kbps)
Fault Reset
Parameter Copy
DriveWorksEZ
Fault Restart
Removable Terminals with Parameter Backup Function
Motor Protection Motor overheat protection via output current sensor
Overcurrent Protection
Drives stops when output exceeds 200% of the rated current (Heavy
Duty)
A stop command will be entered after operating at 150% for 60 s
Overload Protection
(Heavy Duty) <4>
Overvoltage Specification
200 V Class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 410 V
400 V Class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 820 V
Drive stops when DC bus voltage falls below the levels indicated:
Low Voltage Protection <5>
190 V (3-phase 200 V), 160 V (single-phase 200 V), 380 V (3-phase
400 V), 350 V (3-phase 380 V)
Protection 3 selections available: Ride-Thru disabled (stops after 15 ms), time base
Functions Momentary Power Loss Ride- of 0.5 s, and continue running as long as the drive control board is
Thru
powered up. <6>
Specifications
Heatsink Overheat Protection Protected by thermistor
Braking Resistor Overheat
Protection
Overheat input signal for braking resistor (Optional ERF-type, 3% ED)
Stall prevention is available during acceleration, deceleration, and

Stall Prevention during run. Separate settings for each type of stall prevention determine
the current level at which stall prevention is triggered.
Cooling Fan Failure Protection Circuit protection (“fan-lock” sensor)
A
Ground Fault Protection Electronic circuit protection <7>
DC Bus Charge LED Remains lit until DC bus voltage falls below 50 V
Item Specification
Storage/Installation Area Indoors
Ambient Temperature
NEMA Type 4X/IP66 enclosure: -10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)
Humidity 95% RH or less with no condensation
Storage Temperature
-20 to +60 °C (-4 to +140 °F) allowed for short-term transport of the
product
Altitude
Up to 1000 meters without derating; up to 3000 meters with output
current and voltage derating.
Shock, Impact
10 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Environment 20 to 55 Hz: 5.9 m/s2
Install the drive in an area free from:
• oil mist and dust
• metal shavings, oil, water or other foreign materials
• radioactive materials
Surrounding Area • combustible materials
• harmful gases and liquids
• excessive vibration
• chlorides
• direct sunlight
Orientation Install the drive vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects
• UL508C
• IEC/EN 61800-3, IEC/EN 61800-5-1
Standards
• ISO/EN 13849-1 Cat.3 PLd, IEC/EN 61508 SIL2
Time from input open to drive output stop is less than 1 ms.
Protective Enclosure
IP20/Open-Chassis or IP00/Open-Chassis <8>
IP20/NEMA Type 1 <9>
BA0001 to BA0006: self-cooled
BA0010 to BA0018: cooling fan
Cooling Method
2A0001 to 2A0004: self-cooled
2A0006 to 2A0069: cooling fan
4A0001 to 4A0004: self-cooled
4A0005 to 4A0038: cooling fan
<1> Speed control accuracy varies somewhat according to the type of motor and drive settings.
<2> Instantaneous average deceleration torque refers to the torque required to decelerate the motor (uncoupled from
the load) from the rated motor speed down to zero in the shortest time.
<3> Ensure that Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration is disabled (L3-04 = 0) or set to 3 when using a
braking resistor or the Braking Resistor Unit. The default setting for the stall prevention function will interfere
with the braking resistor.
<4> Overload protection may be triggered when operating with 150% of the rated output current if the output
frequency is less than 6 Hz.
<5> Parameter settings allow up to 150 V.
<6> A Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Unit is required for 200/400 V class drives 7.5 kW and less if the application
needs to continue running during a momentary power loss up to 2 seconds.
<7> Ground protection cannot be provided under the following circumstances when a ground fault is likely in the
motor windings during run: Low ground resistance for the motor cable and terminal block; low ground resistance
for the motor cable and terminal block; or the drive is powered up from a ground short.
<8> The following models have an IP20/Open-Chassis enclosure as standard. Customers may convert these models
to IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosures using the IP20/NEMA Type 1 Kit Option:
2A0030 to 2A0069
4A0018 to 4A0038
<9> The following models have an IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure as standard. For an IP20/Open-Chassis or IP00/
Open-Chassis design, remove the top and bottom covers:
BA0001 to BA0018
2A0001 to 2A0020
4A0001 to 4A0011
Note: Time from input open to drive output stop is less than 1 ms.
Specifications
Appendix: B
Parameter List
This chapter contains a listing of all parameters available in the
drive.
B.1 PARAMETER TABLE......................................174
B.1 Parameter Table
B.1 Parameter Table

A1: Initialization Parameters
Use A1 parameters to configure the basic environment for drive operation.
0: English
1: Japanese
2: German
3: French
A1-00 Language Selection 4: Italian
5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
7: Chinese
0: Operation only
A1-01 Access Level Selection 1: User Parameters (access to parameters selected by the user)
2: Advanced Access Level
0: V/f Control without PG
2: Open Loop Vector (OLV)
5: PM Open Loop Vector (PM)
A1-02 Control Method Selection Note: 1. Does not return to the default setting after initialization.
2. If using Open Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2), then Auto-Tuning
must be performed again after the drive is initialized. Refer to Auto-
Tuning on page 113 for details.
0: No Initialization
1110: User Initialize (First set user parameter values must be stored
using parameter o2-03)
A1-03 Initialize Parameters 2220: 2-Wire Initialization
5550: oPE04 Error Reset
A1-04 Password Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
A1-05 Password Setting Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
A1-06 Application Preset Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
A1-07 DriveWorksEZ Function Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
A2: User Parameters
Use A2 parameters to program the drive.
A2-01
to User Parameters, 1 to 32 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
A2-32
User Parameter Automatic Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
A2-33
b1: Operation Mode Selection

Use b1 parameters to configure the operation mode.
0: Digital Operator - Digital preset speed d1-01 to d1-17.
1: Terminals - Analog input terminal A1 or A2.
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 2: Memobus communications
3: Option PCB
4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP)
B.1 Parameter Table

0: Digital Operator - RUN and STOP keys on the digital operator.
1: Digital input terminals S1 to S7
b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 2: Memobus communications
3: Option PCB.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
b1-03 Stopping Method Selection 2: DC Injection Braking to Stop
3: Coast with Timer (A new run command is ignored if received
before the timer expires)
0: Reverse enabled.
b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection 1: Reverse disabled.
b1-07 Local/Remote Run Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
0: Run command accepted only in the operation menu.
Run Command Selection while in
b1-08 1: Run command accepted in all menus.
Programming Mode 2: Prohibit entering programming mode during Run
Sets phase order for drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3.
b1-14 Phase Order Selection 0: Standard
1: Switch phase order
b1-15 Frequency Reference Selection 2 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b1-16 Run Command Selection 2 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b1-17 Run Command at Power Up Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b2: DC Injection Braking
Use b2 parameters to configure DC Injection Braking operation
DC Injection Braking Start
b2-01 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Frequency
Sets the DC Injection Braking current as a percentage of the drive
b2-02 DC Injection Braking Current rated current.
DC Injection Braking Time/DC Sets DC Injection Braking time at start. Disabled when set to 0.00
b2-03 Excitation Time at Start seconds.
b2-04 DC Injection Braking Time at Stop Sets DC Injection Braking time at stop.
Magnetic Flux Compensation
Value
b2-12 Short Circuit Brake Time at Start Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b2-13 Short Circuit Brake Time at Stop Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b3: Speed Search Parameter List
Use B3 parameters to configure Speed Search function operation.
b3-01 Speed Search Selection at Start Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Sets the current level at which the speed is assumed to be detected
b3-02 Speed Search Deactivation Current and Speed Search is ended. Set in percent of the drive rated current.
Sets time constant used to reduce the output frequency during speed
b3-03 Speed Search Deceleration Time search. Related to a change from max. output frequency to 0.
b3-05 Speed Search Delay Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
B
B.1 Parameter Table

Output Current 1 during Speed
Search
Current Control Gain during Speed Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b3-08 Search (Speed Estimation Type) Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1022 and later.
Speed Search Detection
Compensation Gain
Bi-Directional Speed Search
Selection
b3-17 Speed Search Restart Current Level Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Speed Search Restart Detection
Time
b3-19 Number of Speed Search Restarts Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b3-24 Speed Search Method Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b3-25 Speed Search Retry Interval Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Speed Search Induced Voltage Level Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b3-29 Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1020 and later.
b4: Timer Function
Use b4 parameters to configure timer function operation.
b4-01 Timer Function On-Delay Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b4-02 Timer Function Off-Delay Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5: PID Control
Use b5 parameters to configure the PID control drive function.
0: Disabled
1: Enable (Deviation is D-controlled)
b5-01 PID Function Setting 2: Enable (Feedback is D-controlled)
3: Enable (Deviation is D-controlled, PID output added to Freq. Ref.)
4: Enable (Feedback is D-controlled, PID output added to Freq. Ref.)
Sets the proportional gain of the PID controller. A setting of 0.00
b5-02 Proportional Gain Setting (P) disables P control.
Sets the integral time for the PID controller. A setting of 0.0 s disables
b5-03 Integral Time Setting (I) integral control.
b5-04 Integral Limit Setting Sets the maximum output possible from the integrator.
Sets D control derivative time. A setting of 0.00 s disables derivative
b5-05 Derivative Time (D) control.
b5-06 PID Output Limit Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5-07 PID Offset Adjustment Applies an offset to the PID controller output.
Sets the amount of time for the filter on the output of the PID
b5-08 PID Primary Delay Time Constant controller.
b5-09 PID Output Level Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5-10 PID Output Gain Setting Sets the gain applied to the PID output.
b5-11 PID Output Reverse Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
B.1 Parameter Table

0: Disabled.
1: Feedback loss detected when PID enabled. Alarm output, operation
is continued without triggering a fault contact.
2: Feedback loss detected when PID enabled. Fault output, operation
is stopped and a fault contact is triggered.
PID Feedback Reference Missing
b5-12 3: Feedback loss detection when PID disabled by digital input. No
Detection Selection alarm/fault output. “PID feedback loss” digital output is switched.
4: PID Feedback error detection when PID disabled by digital input.
An alarm is triggered and the drive continues to run.
5: PID Feedback error detection when PID disabled by digital input.
Fault is triggered and output is shut off.
PID Feedback Loss Detection
b5-13 Sets the PID feedback loss detection level.
Level
b5-14 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Sets the PID feedback loss detection delay time.
b5-15 PID Sleep Function Start Level Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5-16 PID Sleep Delay Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5-17 PID Accel/Decel Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5-18 PID Setpoint Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5-19 PID Setpoint Value Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5-20 PID Setpoint Scaling Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5-34 PID Output Lower Limit Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5-35 PID Input Limit Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
PID Feedback High Detection Level Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5-36
PID Feedback High Level Detection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5-37 Time
b5-38 PID Setpoint / User Display Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5-39 PID Setpoint Display Digits Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Frequency Reference Monitor Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5-40 Content during PID Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1014 and later.
Reverse Operation Selection 2 by Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b5-47 PID Output Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1020 and later.
b6: Dwell Function
Use b6 parameters to configure dwell function operation.
b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start
Parameter List
b6-02 Dwell Time at Start

Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
b6-03 Dwell Frequency at Stop
b6-04 Dwell Time at Stop
b8: Energy Saving
Use b8 parameters to configure the energy saving/conservation drive function.
0: Disabled
b8-01 Energy Saving Control Selection 1: Enabled (set b8-04) B
B.1 Parameter Table

b8-02 Energy Saving Gain Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Energy Saving Control Filter Time
Constant
Sets the Energy Saving coefficient and is used to fine adjustments in
b8-04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value V/f Control.
Sets a filter time for the Power Detection used by Energy Savings in
b8-05 Power Detection Filter Time V/f Control.
Sets the limit for the voltage search operation performed by Energy
b8-06 Search Operation Voltage Limit Savings in V/f Control.
C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Times
Use C1 parameters to configure motor acceleration and deceleration.
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum frequency.
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to 0.
Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum frequency when Accel/
C1-03 Acceleration Time 2 Decel times 2 are selected by a digital input.
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to 0 when
C1-04 Deceleration Time 2 Accel/Decel times 2 are selected by a digital input.
Acceleration Time 3 (Motor 2 Accel Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum frequency when Accel/
C1-05 Time 1) Decel times 3 are selected by a digital input.
Deceleration Time 3 (Motor 2 Decel Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to 0 when
C1-06
Time 1) Accel/Decel times 3 are selected by a digital input.
Acceleration Time 4 (Motor 2 Accel Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum frequency when Accel/
C1-07 Time 2) Decel times 4 are selected by a digital input.
Deceleration Time 4 (Motor 2 Decel Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to 0 when
C1-08 Time 2) Accel/Decel times 4 are selected by a digital input.
C1-09 Fast-Stop Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
0: 0.01 s (0.00 to 600.00 s)
C1-10 Accel/Decel Time Setting Units 1: 0.1 s (0.0 to 6000.0 s)
Accel/Decel Time Switching
C1-11 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Frequency
C1-14 Accel/Decel Rate Frequency Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1020 and later.
C2: S-Curve Characteristics
Use C2 parameters to configure S-curve operation.
S-Curve Characteristic at Accel Start
C2-01
S-Curve Characteristic at Accel

C2-02 End S-curve is used to further soften the starting and stopping ramp. The
S-Curve Characteristic at Decel Start longer the S-curve time, the softer the starting and stopping ramp.
C2-03
S-Curve Characteristic at Decel

C2-04 End
B.1 Parameter Table

C3: Slip Compensation
Use C3 parameters to configure the slip compensation function.
C3-01 Slip Compensation Gain Sets the slip compensation gain.
Slip Compensation Primary Delay
C3-02 Adjusts the slip compensation function delay time.
Time
C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Slip Compensation Selection during 0: Disabled
C3-04 Regeneration 1: Enabled
Output Voltage Limit Operation
Selection
C4: Torque Compensation
Use C4 parameters to configure Torque Compensation function.
V/f control: Sets the gain for the automatic torque (voltage) boost
function and helps to produce better starting torque.
C4-01 Torque Compensation Gain Open Loop Vector: Sets the torque compensation function gain.
Normally no change is required.
Torque Compensation Primary
C4-02 Sets the torque compensation filter time.
Delay Time
Torque Compensation at Forward
Start
Torque Compensation at Reverse
Start
Torque Compensation Time
Constant
Torque Compensation Primary
Delay Time 2
C5: Speed Control (ASR)
Use C5 parameters to configure the Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR).
C5 parameters are available only when using V/f with Simple PG (H6-01 = 3).
C5-01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
C5-02 ASR Integral Time 1 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
C5-03 ASR Proportional Gain 2 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
C5-04 ASR Integral Time 2 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
C5-05 ASR Limit Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details. Parameter List
C6: Carrier Frequency
Use C6 parameters to configure the carrier frequency drive settings.
C6-01 Drive Duty Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
B.1 Parameter Table

1: 2.0 kHz
2: 5.0 kHz
3: 8.0 kHz
4: 10.0 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15.0 kHz
7: Swing PWM 1 (Audible sound 1)
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection 8: Swing PWM 2 (Audible sound 2)
9: Swing PWM 3 (Audible sound 3)
A: Swing PWM 4 (Audible sound 4)
B: Leakage Current Rejection PWM
C to E: No setting possible
F: User-defined (determined by C6-03 through C6-05)
Note: Setting B is available in drive software versions PRG: 1020
and later.
C6-03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit
C6-04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit
Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
C6-05
d1: Frequency Reference

Use d1 parameters to configure the drive frequency reference.
Frequency reference. Refer to Frequency Reference Source: b1-01
d1-01 Frequency Reference 1 on page 107 for instructions to use d1-01 as the main frequency
reference.
Frequency reference when digital input “Multi-Step Speed Reference
d1-02 Frequency Reference 2
1” (H1- = 3) is on.
2” (H1- = 4) is on.
Frequency reference when digital inputs “Multi-Step Speed
Reference 1, 2” (H1- = 3 and 4) are on.
3” (H1- = 5) is on.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-Step speed
reference 1, 2, 3” (H1- = 3, 4, 5) are on.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-Step Speed
Reference 4” (H1- = 32) is on.
1, 4” (H1- = 3 and 32) are on.
Reference 1, 2, 4” (H1- = 3, 4, 32) are on.
B.1 Parameter Table

Reference 1, 2, 3, 4” (H1- = 3, 4, 5, 32) are on.
Frequency reference when digital inputs “Jog Frequency Reference,”
d1-17 Jog Frequency Reference “Forward Jog” or “Reverse Jog.” are on.
d2: Frequency Upper and Lower Limits
Use d2 parameters to configure the frequency reference limits.
Sets the frequency reference upper limit as a percentage of maximum
d2-01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit output frequency (E1-04).
Sets the frequency reference lower limit as a percentage of maximum
d2-02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit output frequency (E1-04).
Master Speed Reference Lower
d2-03 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Limit
d3: Jump Frequency
Use d3 parameters to configure the drive Jump Frequency settings.
d3-01 Jump Frequency 1
d3-01 to d3-04 allow programming of three prohibited frequency
d3-02 Jump Frequency 2 reference points for eliminating problems with resonant vibration of
the motor / machine.
d3-03 Jump Frequency 3
This parameter sets the dead-band width around each selected
d3-04 Jump Frequency Width prohibited frequency reference point.
d4: Frequency Reference Hold
Use d4 parameters to configure the drive frequency reference hold function.
Frequency Reference Hold Function 0: Disabled
d4-01 Selection 1: Enabled
Frequency Reference Bias Step (Up/ Sets the bias added to the frequency reference when the Up/Down 2
d4-03 Down 2) digital inputs are set.
Frequency Reference Accel/Decel 0: Adjusts bias value according to currently selected accel/decel time.
d4-04 (Up/Down 2) 1: Adjusts the bias value by Accel/Decel Time 4 (C1-07 and C1-08).
0: Holds the bias value when Up/Down 2 reference is on or off.
Frequency Reference Bias Operation 1: When the Up 2 reference and Down 2 reference are both on or both
Parameter List
d4-05 Mode Selection (Up/Down 2) off, applied bias becomes 0 using currently selected accel/ decel.
times.
Frequency Reference Bias (Up/
d4-06 Saves the bias value once the frequency reference is adjusted.
Down 2)
When the Up 2 and Down 2 commands are enabled, the frequency
Analog Frequency Reference reference holds the bias value as the levels for the analog frequency
d4-07 Fluctuation Limit (Up/Down 2) reference or pulse train frequency reference change, accelerating or
decelerating to the frequency reference.
B
B.1 Parameter Table

Frequency Reference Bias Upper
d4-08 When d4-06 is greater than d4-08, d4-08 becomes bias for upper limit.
Limit (Up/Down 2)
Frequency Reference Bias Lower
d4-09 When d4-06 is less than d4-09, d4-09 becomes bias for lower limit.
Limit (Up/Down 2)
Up/Down Frequency Reference 0: Lower Limit is determined by d2-02 or analog input.
d4-10 Limit Selection 1: Lower Limit is determined by d2-02.
d7: Offset Frequency
Use d7 parameters to set the offset frequency.
d7-01 Offset Frequency 1 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E1: V/f Pattern Characteristics
Use E1 parameters to set V/f characteristics for the motor.
E1-01 Input Voltage Setting Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency Only applicable when E1-03 is set to F.
E1-05 Maximum Output Voltage Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E1-06 Base Frequency Only applicable when E1-03 is set to F.
Only applicable when E1-03 is set to F. To set linear V/f
E1-07 Middle Output Freq. characteristics, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09.
E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage Only applicable when E1-03 is set to F.
Only applicable when E1-03 is set to F. To set linear V/f
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency characteristics, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09.
Minimum Output Frequency
E1-10 Only applicable when E1-03 is set to F.
Voltage
E1-11 Middle Output Frequency 2 Only applicable when E1-03 is set to F.
Middle Output Frequency Voltage
E1-12 Only applicable when E1-03 is set to F.
2
E1-13 Base Voltage Only applicable when E1-03 is set to F.
E2: Motor Parameters
Use E2 parameters to set motor-related data.
E2-01 Motor Rated Current Sets motor nameplate full load current in amperes (A).
E2-02 Motor Rated Slip Sets the motor rated slip in hertz (Hz).
Sets the magnetizing current of the motor as a percentage of the motor
E2-03 Motor No-Load Current rated current (E2-01).
E2-04 Number of Motor Poles Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E2-05 Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Sets the phase-to-phase motor resistance in ohms.
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage
E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance of motor rated voltage.
B.1 Parameter Table

Motor Iron-Core Saturation
E2-07 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Coefficient 1
Coefficient 2
E2-09 Motor Mechanical Loss Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Motor Iron Loss for Torque
E2-10 Sets the motor iron loss in watts (W).
Compensation
E2-11 Motor Rated Output Sets the motor rated power in kilowatts (kW).
Coefficient 3
E3: Motor 2 V/f Characteristics
Use E3 parameters to set the V/f pattern for a second motor.
E3-01 Motor 2 Control Method Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E3-04 Motor 2 Max Output Frequency Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E3-05 Motor 2 Max Voltage Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E3-06 Motor 2 Base Frequency Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E3-07 Motor 2 Mid Output Freq. Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E3-08 Motor 2 Mid Output Freq. Voltage Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E3-09 Motor 2 Min. Output Freq. Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Motor 2 Min. Output Freq.
Voltage
E3-11 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency 2 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency
Voltage 2
E3-13 Motor 2 Base Voltage Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E4: Motor 2 Parameters
Use E4 parameters to control a second motor operating on the same drive.
E4-01 Motor 2 Rated Current Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E4-02 Motor 2 Rated Slip Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E4-03 Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E4-04 Motor 2 Motor Poles Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Parameter List
E4-05 Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E4-06 Motor 2 Leakage Inductance Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Motor 2 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E4-07 Coefficient 1
Motor 2 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E4-08 Coefficient 2
E4-09 Motor 2 Mechanical Loss Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E4-10 Motor 2 Iron Loss Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details. B
B.1 Parameter Table

E4-11 Motor 2 Rated Capacity Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Motor 2 Iron-Core Saturation
Coefficient 3
E4-14 Motor 2 Slip Compensation Gain Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Torque Compensation Gain - Motor Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E4-15 2
E5: PM Motor Parameters
Motor Code Selection (for PM
motor)
Motor Rated Capacity (for PM
motor)
E5-03 Motor Rated Current Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E5-04 Motor Poles Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E5-05 Motor Stator Resistance Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E5-06 Motor d Axis Inductance Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
E5-07 Motor q Axis Inductance Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Motor Induction Voltage Constant
1
Motor Induction Voltage Constant
2
E5-39 Current Detection Delay Time Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1022 and later.
F1: Simple PG V/f Parameters
Use F1 parameters to set up the drive for Simple PG V/f control. These parameters are enabled only when H6-01 = 03
Operation Selection at PG Open
F1-02 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Circuit (PGO)
Operation Selection at Overspeed
(OS)
F1-04 Operation Selection at Deviation Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
F1-08 Overspeed Detection Level Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
F1-09 Overspeed Detection Delay Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Excessive Speed Deviation
Detection Level
Excessive Speed Deviation
Detection Delay Time
F1-14 PG Open-Circuit Detection Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
F6: Serial Communications Option Card Settings
Use F6 parameters to program the drive for serial communication.
Communications Error Operation
Selection
B.1 Parameter Table

External Fault from Comm. Option
Detection Selection
External Fault from Comm. Option
Operation Selection
F6-04 bUS Error Detection Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
NetRef/ComRef Function Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.

F6-07 Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1014 and later.
F6-08 Reset Communication Parameters Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1014 and later.
F6-10 CC-Link Node Address Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
F6-11 CC-Link Communication Speed Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
F6-14 CC-Link bUS Error Auto Reset Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
MECHATROLINK Station Address Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.

F6-20 Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1023 and later.
F6-21 MECHATROLINK Frame Size Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1023 and later.
F6-22 MECHATROLINK Link Speed Note 1: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1023 and later.
Note 2: Available for MECHATROLINK-II only.
MECHATROLINK Monitor Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
F6-23
Selection (E) Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1023 and later.
MECHATROLINK Monitor Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
F6-24 Selection (F) Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1023 and later.
Operation Selection at Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
F6-25 MECHATROLINK Watchdog Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1023 and later.
Timer Error (E5)
MECHATROLINK bUS Errors Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
F6-26 Detected Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1023 and later.
F6-30 PROFIBUS-DP Node Address Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
PROFIBUS-DP Clear Mode
Selection
PROFIBUS-DP Data Format
Selection
F6-35 CANopen Node ID Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details. Parameter List
F6-36 CANopen Communication Speed Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
F6-40 CompoNet Node address Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
F6-41 CompoNet Communication Speed Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
F6-50 DeviceNet MAC Address Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1011 and later.
F6-51 DeviceNet Communication Speed Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1011 and later.
B
B.1 Parameter Table

F6-52 DeviceNet PCA Setting Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1011 and later.
F6-53 DeviceNet PPA Setting Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1011 and later.
DeviceNet Idle Mode Fault Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
F6-54 Detection Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1011 and later.
F6-55 DeviceNet Baud Rate Monitor Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1012 and later.
F6-56 DeviceNet Speed Scaling Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1011 and later.
F6-57 DeviceNet Current Scaling Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1011 and later.
F6-58 DeviceNet Torque Scaling Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1011 and later.
F6-59 DeviceNet Power Scaling Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1011 and later.
F6-60 DeviceNet Voltage Scaling Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1011 and later.
F6-61 DeviceNet Time Scaling Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1011 and later.
F6-62 DeviceNet Heartbeat Interval Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1011 and later.
Dynamic Output Assembly 109
Parameter 1
Note: Function available in versions
F6-63 PRG: 1012 and earlier. Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
MAC ID Memory
PRG: 1014 and later.
Parameter 2
PRG: 1012 and earlier.
Parameter 1
Parameter 3
Parameter 2
B.1 Parameter Table

Parameter 4
Parameter 3
Parameter 1
Parameter 4
Parameter 2
Parameter 1
Parameter 3
Parameter 2
Parameter 4
Parameter 3
PRG: 1014 and later. Parameter List
Parameter 4
F6-71 Note: Function available in versions Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
F7: EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP/IP Option Parameters
Use F7 parameters to program the drive for EtherNet communication.
F7 parameters are reserved for use with SI-EN3/V and SI-EM3/V
F7-01 to EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP/IP options. Refer to the respective Option Installation Manuals for
F7-42 Option Parameters details. B
B.1 Parameter Table

H1: Multi-Function Digital Input
H1 parameters to assign functions to the multi-function digital input terminals. Unused terminals should be set to “F”.
H1-01 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S1 Function Selection Selects function of terminal S1
H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Selections

H1-
Function Description
Setting
0 3-Wire Sequence Closed: Reverse rotation (only for 3-wire sequence)
Open: Remote, Reference 1 or 2 (b1-01/02 or b1-15/16)
1 Local/Remote Selection Closed: Local, LED operator is run and reference source
Open: Run and frequency reference source 1 (b1-01/02)
2 External Reference 1/2 Closed: Run and frequency reference source 2 (b1-01/02)
3 Multi-Step Speed Reference 1
4 Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 Used to select Multi-Step Speeds set in d1-01 to d1-16
5 Multi-Step Speed Reference 3
Open: Selected speed reference
6 Jog Reference Selection Closed: Jog Frequency reference (d1-17). Jog has priority over all other
reference sources.
7 Accel/Decel Time 1 Used to switch between Accel/Decel. Time 1/2
Open: Normal operation
8 Baseblock Command (N.O.) Closed: No drive output
Open: No drive output
9 Baseblock Command (N.C.) Closed: Normal operation
Closed: The drive pauses during acceleration or deceleration and maintains
A Accel/Decel Ramp Hold the output frequency.
B Drive Overheat Alarm (oH2) Closed: Closes when an oH2 alarm occurs.
Terminal status differs depending on drive software version.
PRG: 1016 and later:
Open: Analog input selected by H3-14 is disabled.
C Terminal A1/A2 Enable Closed: Analog input selected by H3-14 is enabled.
PRG: 1015 and earlier:
Open: Analog inputs selected for terminals A1 and A2 are disabled.
Closed: Analog inputs selected for terminals A1 and A2 are enabled.
Select this setting when not using the terminal or when using the terminal
F Not used in a pass-through mode.
B.1 Parameter Table

H1-
Setting
10 Up Command Open: Maintains the current frequency reference
11 Down Command Closed: Increases or decreases the current frequency reference
12 Forward Jog Closed: Runs forward at the Jog Frequency d1-17.
13 Reverse Jog Closed: Runs reverse at the Jog Frequency d1-17.
14 Fault Reset Closed: Resets faults if cause is cleared and Run command removed.
15 Fast-Stop (N.O.) Closed: Decelerates at the Fast-Stop time C1-09.
Open: Motor 1 (E1-, E2-)
16 Motor 2 Selection
Closed: Motor 2 (E3-, E4-)
17 Fast-stop (N.C.) Open: Decelerates according to C1-09 (Fast-stop Time)
18 Timer Input Function Set the timer delay using parameters b4-01 and b4-02.
19 PID Disable Closed: PID control disabled
1A Accel/Decel Time Selection 2 Switches Accel/Decel times.
Open: Parameters can not be edited. (except U1-01 if reference source is
1B Program Lockout set for operator)
Closed: Parameters may be edited and saved.
Closed: Samples the analog frequency reference and operates the drive at
1E Reference Sample Hold that speed.
20: N.O., Always Detected, Ramp To Stop
21: N.C., Always Detected, Ramp To Stop
22: N.O., During Run, Ramp To Stop
23: N.C., During Run, Ramp To Stop
24: N.O., Always Detected, Coast To Stop
25: N.C., Always Detected, Coast To Stop
26: N.O., During Run, Coast To Stop
20 to 2F External Fault 27: N.C., During Run, Coast To Stop
28: N.O., Always Detected, Fast-stop
29: N.C., Always Detected, Fast-stop
2A: N.O., During Run, Fast-stop
2B: N.C., During Run, Fast-stop
2C: N.O., Always Detected, Alarm Only (continue running)
2D: N.C., Always Detected, Alarm Only (continue running)
2E: N.O., During Run, Alarm Only (continue running)
2F: N.C., During Run, Alarm Only (continue running)
30 PID Integral Reset Closed: Resets the PID control integral value. Parameter List
31 PID Integral Hold Closed: Maintains the current PID control integral value.
32 Multi-Step Speed Reference 4 Used to select Multi-Step Speeds set in d1-01 to d1-16
34 PID Soft Starter Closed: Disables the PID soft starter b5-17.
35 PID Input Switch Closed: Inverses the PID input signal
Forward Run Command Open: Stop
40 (2-wire sequence) Closed: Forward run
B.1 Parameter Table

H1-
Setting
Reverse Run Command (2-wire Open: Stop
41 sequence) Closed: Reverse run
Run Command (2-wire Open: Stop
42 sequence 2) Closed: Run
FWD/REV Command (2-wire Open: Forward
43 sequence 2) Closed: Reverse
44 Offset Frequency 1 Addition Closed: Adds d7-01 to the frequency reference.
Closed: Node Setup for SI-S3/V enabled.
47 Node Setup Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1016 and later.
DC Injection Braking
60 Closed: Triggers DC Injection Braking (b2-02)
Command
Closed: Activates Current Detection Speed Search from the max. output
61 External Search Command 1 frequency (E1-04) if b3-01 = 0.
Closed: Activates Current Detection Speed Search from the frequency
62 External Search Command 2 reference if b3-01 = 0. Activates Speed Estimation Type Speed search if
b3-01 = 0.
Open: KEB Ride-Thru 1 enabled
65 KEB Ride-Thru 1 (N.C.) Closed: Normal operation
66 KEB Ride-Thru 1 (N.O.) Closed: KEB Ride-Thru 1 enabled
67 Communications Test Mode Tests the MEMOBUS/Modbus RS-485/422 interface.
68 High-Slip Braking Closed: High-Slip braking is executed. Drive stops.
Open: Drive disabled. If this input is opened during run, then the drive will
6A Drive Enable stop as specified by parameter b1-03.
Closed: Ready for operation.
75 Up 2 Command Open: Maintains the current frequency reference
76 Down 2 Command Closed: Increases or decreases the frequency reference.
Open: KEB Ride-Thru 2 enabled
7A KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.C.) Closed: Normal operation
7B KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.O.) Closed: KEB Ride-Thru 2 enabled
7C Short-Circuit Braking (N.O.) Open: Normal operation
7D Short-Circuit Braking (N.C.) Closed: Short-Circuit Braking
7E Forward/Reverse Detection Direction of rotation detection (for Simple V/f w/PG)
90 to 96 DriveWorksEZ Digital Input 1 These settings are for digital input functions used in DriveWorksEZ.
to 7 Normally there is no need to change or apply these settings.
B.1 Parameter Table

H1-
Setting
Open: DWEZ enabled
9F DriveWorksEZ enable Closed: DWEZ disabled
No. Name Description Range

H2: Multi-Function Digital Outputs
Use H2 parameters to assign functions to the multi-function digital outputs.
H2-01 Terminal MA, MB and MC Function Selection (relay)
Refer to “Multi-Function Digital
H2-02 Terminal P1 Function Selection (open-collector) Output Selection Table” for a 0 to 192
description of setting values.
H2-03 Terminal P2 Function Selection (open-collector)
H2-06 Watt Hour Output Unit Selection Refer to V1000 Tech Manual. 0 to 4
H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings

H2-
Setting
0 During Run Closed: A Run command is active or voltage is output.
1 Zero Speed Closed: Output frequency is 0.
Closed: Output frequency equals the speed reference (plus or minus the
2 Speed Agree 1 hysteresis set to L4-02).
Closed: Output frequency and speed reference equal the value in L4-01
3 User Set Speed Agree 1 (plus or minus the hysteresis of L4-02).
Closed: Output frequency is less than or equal to the value in L4-01 with
4 Frequency Detection 1 hysteresis determined by L4-02.
Closed: Output frequency is greater than or equal to the value in L4-01,
5 Frequency Detection 2 with hysteresis determined by L4-02.
Closed: Drive Ready. The drive is powered up, not in a fault state, and
6 Drive Ready in the Drive mode.
7 DC Bus Undervoltage Closed: DC bus voltage is below the UV trip level set in L2-05.
8 During Baseblock (N.O.) Closed: This is no output voltage
9 Frequency Reference Source Closed: Digital operator supplies the frequency reference.
Open: Reference 1 or 2 are active
A Run Command Source Closed: Digital operator supplies the run command. Parameter List
Closed: Output current/torque exceeds the torque value set in parameter
B Torque Detection 1 (N.O.) L6-02 for longer than the time set in parameter L6-03.
Closed: Loss of the analog frequency reference detected. Enabled when
C Frequency Reference Loss L4-05 = 1.
D Braking Resistor Fault Closed: Braking resistor or transistor is overheated or faulted out.
E Fault Closed: Fault occurred (other than CPF00 and CPF01).
F Not used/Through Mode Set this value when the terminal is not used, or when using the terminal
in the pass-through mode. B
B.1 Parameter Table

H2-
Setting
10 Alarm Closed: An alarm is triggered.
Closed: The drive has received a reset command from the multi-function
11 Reset Command Active input terminals or from serial network, or the digital operator RESET
key has been pressed.
Timer output, controlled by b4-01 and b4-02. Used in conjunction with
12 Timer Output the digital input (H1- = 18 “timer function”).
Closed: When drive output frequency equals the frequency reference +/-
13 Speed Agree 2 L4-04.
Closed: When the drive output frequency is equal to the value in L4-03
14 User Set Speed Agree 2 (plus or minus L4-04).
Closed: When the drive output frequency is less than or equal to the value
15 Frequency Detection 3 in L4-03 with the hysteresis determined by L4-04.
Closed: When the output frequency is greater than or equal to the value
16 Frequency Detection 4 in L4-03 with the hysteresis determined by L4-04.
Open: When the output current/torque exceeds the value set in parameter
17 Torque Detection 1 (N.C.) L6-02 for more time than is set in parameter L6-03.
Closed: When the output current/torque exceeds the value set in
18 Torque Detection 2 (N.O.) parameter L6-05 for more time than is set in parameter L6-06.
Open: Output current/torque exceeds the value set in parameter L6-05
19 Torque Detection 2 (N.C.) for more time than is set in parameter L6-06.
1A During Reverse Operation Closed: Drive is running in the reverse direction.
1B During Baseblock (N.C.) Open: Drive is in base block condition. Output is disabled.
1C Motor 2 Selection Closed: Motor 2 is selected by a digital input (H1- = 16)
1E Restart Enabled Closed: An automatic restart is performed
1F Motor Overload Alarm (oL1) Closed: OL1 is at 90% of its trip point or greater.
20 Drive Overheat Pre-alarm (oH) Closed: Heatsink temperature exceeds the parameter L8-02 value.
22 Mechanical Weakening Closed: Mechanical Weakening detected.
Closed: cooling fan, electrolytic capacitors, IGBTs, or the soft charge
2F Maintenance Period bypass relay may require maintenance.
Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1016 and later.
30 During Torque Limit Closed: When the torque limit has been reached.
Open: No frequency output from drive if stopped, with baseblock, with
DC injection braking during initial excitation, or with short-circuit
37 During Frequency Output braking.
Closed: Drive is outputting a frequency
38 Drive Enable Closed: Multi-function input closes (H1- = 6A)
Output units are determined by H2-06, outputs 200 ms pulse for each
39 Watt Hour Pulse Output incremented kWh count.
Closed: LOCAL
3C LOCAL/REMOTE Status Open: REMOTE
B.1 Parameter Table

H2-
Setting
3D During Speed Search Closed: Speed search is being executed.
3E PID Feedback Low Closed: PID Feedback Loss.
3F PID Feedback High Closed: PID Feedback Fault.
4A During KEB Operation Closed: KEB is being performed.
4B During Short-Circuit Brake Closed: Short-Circuit Braking is active.
4C During Fast-stop Closed: Fast-stop command is entered
4D oH Pre-alarm Time Limit Closed: oH Pre-alarm time limit is passed.
Closed: The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed.
4E Braking Transistor Fault (rr) Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1016 and later.
Closed: The dynamic braking resistor overheated.
4F Braking Resistor Overheat (oH) Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1016 and later.
90 to 92 DriveWorksEZ Digital Output 1 These settings are for digital output functions used in DriveWorksEZ.
to 3 Normally there is no need to change or apply these settings.
H2 Parameter Functions Reverse the output switching of the multi-function output functions. Set
100 to Reversed Output Switching of 0 the last two digits of 1 to reverse the output signal of that specific
192 to 92 function.

H3: Analog Inputs
Use H3 parameters to set the multi-function analog input terminals.
0: 0 to +10 V (lower limit)
H3-01 Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection 1: 0 to +10 V (no lower limit)
H3-02 Terminal A1 Function Selection Sets the function of terminal A1.
Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 10V is input
H3-03 Terminal A1 Gain Setting at terminal A1.
Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 0V is input
H3-04 Terminal A1 Bias Setting at terminal A1.
Sets the input signal level for terminal A2.
0: 0 to +10 V (with lower limit)
H3-09 Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection 1: 0 to +10 V (no lower limit)
2: 4 to 20 mA
3: 0 to 20 mA Parameter List
H3-10 Terminal A2 Function Selection Sets the function of terminal A2.
Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 10 V (20
H3-11 Terminal A2 Gain Setting mA) is input at terminal A2.
Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 0 V (0 or 4
H3-12 Terminal A2 Bias Setting mA) is input at terminal A2.
Sets the primary delay filter time constant for terminals A1 and A2.
H3-13 Analog Input Filter Time Constant Used for noise filtering.
B
B.1 Parameter Table

Determines which analog input terminal or terminals will be enabled
when a digital input programmed for “Analog input enable” (H1-
Analog Input Terminal Enable  = C) is activated.
H3-14 1: Terminal A1 only
Selection
2: Terminal A2 only
7: All terminals enabled
Enter a 0 V signal to terminal A1. Next adjust the offset in H3-16
until the monitor U1-13 for the terminal A1 input voltage reads 0.0%.
H3-16 Terminal A1 Offset The process is the same for terminal A2.
Enter a 0 V signal, and adjust the offset for terminal A2 in H3-17
H3-17 Terminal A2 Offset until the monitor U1-14 for terminal A2 input voltage reads 0.0%.
H3 Multi-Function Analog Input Settings

H3-
Function Maximum Input Level Possible
Setting
0 Frequency Bias Max output frequency (E1-04).
1 Frequency Gain Frequency reference (voltage)
2 Auxiliary Frequency Reference (used as multi-step speed 2) Max output frequency (E1-04)
200 V Class: 200 V
4 Output Voltage Bias
400 V Class: 400 V
Open Loop Vector: Motor rated torque
7 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level V/f control: Drive rated current
B PID Feedback 10V = 100%
C PID Set Point 10V = 100%
E Motor Temperature (PTC input) 10 V = 100.00%
F Not used/Through Mode –
10 FWD Torque Limit Motor rated torque
11 REV Torque Limit Motor rated torque
12 Regenerative Torque Limit Motor rated torque
15 FWD/REV Torque Limit Motor rated torque
16 Differential PID Feedback 10 V = 100%
These settings are for analog output
functions used in DriveWorksEZ.
30/31 DriveWorksEZ Analog Input 1/2 Normally there is no need to change or
apply these settings.
Output Voltage Gain
41 10 V = 100.00%
Note: Function available in versions PRG: 1016 and later.
B.1 Parameter Table

H4: Multi-Function Analog Outputs
Use H4 parameters to configure the multi-function analog output terminals.
Multi-Function Analog Output
H4-01 Selects data output via multi-function analog output terminal AM.
Terminal AM)
H4-02 Sets terminal AM output level when selected monitor is at 100%.
Terminal AM Gain
H4-03 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Terminal AM Gain
H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications
Use H5 Parameters to connect the drive to a MEMOBUS/Modbus network.
The settings for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications become effective when the drive is restarted.
Selects drive station node number (address) for MEMOBUS/Modbus
H5-01 Drive Node Address terminals R+, R-, S+, S-. Cycle power for the setting to take effect.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
H5-02 Communication Speed Selection 4: 19200 bps
5: 38400 bps
6: 57600 bps
7: 76800 bps
8: 115200 bps
0: No parity
H5-03 Communication Parity Selection 1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
0: Ramp to stop
Stopping Method After 1: Coast to stop
H5-04 Communication Error 2: Fast-stop
3: Alarm only
0: Disabled
Communication Fault Detection
H5-05 1: Enabled - If communication is lost for more than two seconds, a CE
Selection fault will occur.
H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait Time Set the wait time between receiving and sending data.
0: Disabled - RTS is always on.
H5-07 RTS Control Selection 1: Enabled - RTS turns on only when sending.
H5-09 CE Detection Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Unit Selection for MEMOBUS/
Modbus Register 0025H Parameter List
Communications ENTER
Function Selection
H5-12 Run Command Method Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
H6: Pulse Train Input/Output
Use H6 parameters to configure Pulse Train I/O operation.
B.1 Parameter Table

0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
Pulse Train Input Terminal RP
H6-01 2: PID setpoint value
Function Selection 3: Simple PG V/f control mode (can be set only when using motor 1 in
the V/f control mode)
Sets the number of pulses (Hz) that is equal to 100% of the value
H6-02 Pulse Train Input Scaling selected in H6-01.
Sets the level of the value selected in H6-01 when a frequency with the
H6-03 Pulse Train Input Gain value set in H6-02 is input.
H6-04 Pulse Train Input Bias Sets the level of the value selected in H6-01 when 0 Hz is input.
H6-05 Pulse Train Input Filter Time Sets the pulse train input filter time constant.
Pulse Train Monitor Terminal MP Select the pulse train monitor output function (value of the - part
H6-06 Selection of U-).
H6-07 Pulse Train Monitor Scaling Sets the pulse output frequency in Hz when the monitor value is 100%.
L1: Motor Protection Functions
Use L1 parameters to configure motor protective functions.
1: General Purpose Motor (Standard Fan Cooled)
2: Drive Dedicated Motor with a Speed Range of 1:10
3: Vector Motor with a Speed Range of 1:100
4: PM Motor with Variable Torque
6: General Purpose Motor (50 Hz)
Motor Overload Protection
L1-01 NOTICE: The thermal protection is reset when the power is cycled.
Selection
In applications where the power is frequently cycled, the drive may not
be able to provide protection, even if this parameter is set to 1. Set to
“0” and ensure each motor has a thermal relay installed.
Note: Setting 6 is available in drive software versions PRG: 1016 and
later.
L1-02 Motor Overload Protection Time Sets the motor thermal overload protection (oL1) time.
Motor Overheat Alarm Operation
L1-03 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Selection (PTC input)
Motor Overheat Fault Operation
Selection (PTC input)
Motor Temperature Input Filter
Time (PTC input)
Continuous Electrothermal
Operation Selection
Leakage Current Filter Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L1-22 Constant 1 Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1021 and later.
Leakage Current Filter Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L1-23 Constant 2 Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1021 and later.
L2: Momentary Power Loss
Use L2 parameters to configure drive functions for momentary power loss conditions.
B.1 Parameter Table

0: Disabled - Drive trips on (UV1) fault when power is lost.
Momentary Power Loss Operation 1: Power Loss Ride-Thru Time - Drive will restart if power returns
L2-01 within the time set in L2-02.
Selection 2: CPU Power Active - Drive will restart if power returns as long as
the CPU is working.
Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L2-02 Time
Momentary Power Loss Minimum Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L2-03 Baseblock Time
Momentary Power Loss Voltage
Recovery Ramp Time
Undervoltage Detection Level
(UV)
L2-06 KEB Deceleration Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L2-07 KEB Acceleration Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
KEB Start Output Frequency
Reduction
Desired DC Bus Voltage during
KEB
L3: Stall Prevention Function
Use L3 parameters to configure the stall prevention function.
Acceleration
Used when L3-01 = 1 or 2.
Stall Prevention Level during
L3-02 100% is equal to the drive rated current. Decrease the set value if
Acceleration stalling or excessive current occurs with default setting.
Stall Prevention Limit during
Acceleration
0: Disabled
1: General Purpose
2: Intelligent
Stall Prevention Selection during 3: Stall Prevention with Braking Resistor
L3-04 Deceleration 4: Overexcitation Deceleration
7: Overexcitation Deceleration 3
Note: Setting 7 is available in drive software versions PRG: 1020 and
later.
0: Disabled
Parameter List
L3-05 1: Decel Time 1
Run 2: Decel Time 2
Stall Prevention Level during Enabled when L3-05 is set to “1” or “2”. 100% is equal to the drive
L3-06 Run rated current.
OV Suppression Function
Selection
Overvoltage Suppression and Stall
L3-17 Prevention Desired DC Bus Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Voltage B
B.1 Parameter Table

Main Power Circuit Voltage
Adjustment Gain
Accel/Decel Rate Calculation Gain Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L3-21
Deceleration Time at Stall

Prevention during Acceleration
0: Sets the stall prevention level throughout the entire frequency range
Automatic Reduction Selection for to the value in parameter L3-06.
L3-23 Stall Prevention during Run 1: Automatically lowers the stall prevention level in the constant output
range. The lower limit value is 40% of L3-06.
Motor Acceleration Time for
Inertia Calculations
L3-25 Load Inertia Ratio Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L4: Frequency Detection
Use L4 parameters to configure frequency detection operation.
Speed Agreement Detection
L4-01 These parameters configure the multi-function output (H2- = 2, 3,
Level
4, 5) settings “Fref/Fout Agree 1,” “Fref/Set Agree 1,” “Frequency
Speed Agreement Detection Width Detection 1,” and “Frequency detection 2.”
L4-02
Speed Agreement Detection Level

L4-03 (+/-)
Speed Agreement Detection Width
L4-04 (+/-)
Frequency Reference Loss 0: Stop - Drive will stop
L4-05 Detection Selection 1: Run at L4-06
Frequency Reference at Reference Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L4-06 Loss
L4-07 Frequency Detection Conditions Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Speed Agreement Detection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L4-08 Conditions Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1016 and later.
L5: Fault Reset
Use L5 parameters to configure Automatic Restart after fault.
Sets the counter for the number of times the drive attempts to restart
Number of Auto Restart
L5-01 when the following faults occur: GF, LF, oC, oH1, ov, PF, rH, rr, oL1,
Attempts oL2, oL3, oL4, STo, Uv1.
L5-02 Auto Restart Operation Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L5-04 Fault Reset Interval Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L5-05 Fault Reset Operation Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L6: Overtorque Detection
Use L6 parameters to configure overtorque detection.
B.1 Parameter Table

0: Disabled
1: oL3 at Speed Agree - Alarm
2: oL3 at RUN - Alarm
3: oL3 at Speed Agree - Fault
L6-01 Torque Detection Selection 1 5: UL3 at Speed Agree - Alarm
6: UL3 at RUN - Alarm
7: UL3 at Speed Agree - Fault
8: UL3 at RUN - Fault
L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1 Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection level.
Sets the length of time an overtorque/undertorque condition must exist
L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1 before Torque Detection 1 is triggered.
L6-04 Torque Detection Selection 2 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L6-05 Torque Detection Level 2 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L6-06 Torque Detection Time 2 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Mechanical Weakening (OL5)
Detection Operation
Mechanical Weakening Detection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L6-09 Speed Level
L6-10 Time
L6-11 Start Time
L7: Torque Limit
Use L7 parameters to configure the torque limit function.
L7-01 Forward Torque Limit
L7-02 Reverse Torque Limit
Forward Regenerative Torque Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L7-03 Limit
Reverse Regenerative Torque
L7-04 Limit
Torque Limit Integral Time
Constant
Torque Limit Control Method
Selection during Accel/Decel
L8: Hardware Protection Parameter List
Use L8 parameters to configure hardware protection functions.
Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor 0: Resistor overheat protection disabled
L8-01 Protection Selection (ERF type) 1: Resistor overheat protection enabled
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation
Selection
Input Phase Loss Protection 0: Disabled
L8-05 Selection 1: Enabled B
B.1 Parameter Table

0: Disabled
Output Phase Loss Protection
L8-07 1: Enabled (triggered by a single phase loss).
Selection 2: Enabled (triggered when two phases are lost).
Output Ground Fault Detection
Selection
Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation 0: Fan On-Run Mode
L8-10 Selection 1: Fan always on
Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation
Delay Time
L8-12 Ambient Temperature Setting Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
OL2 Characteristics Selection at
Low Speeds
L8-18 Soft Current Limit Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Frequency Reduction Rate during Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L8-19 OH Pre-Alarm
Current Unbalance Detection
(LF2)
L8-35 Installation Method Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
0: Disabled
2: Enabled for the whole speed range
L8-40 Carrier Frequency Reduction Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L8-41 High Current Alarm Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
L8-51 STo Fault Detection Level Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1018 and later.
L8-54 STo Deviation Detection Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1018 and later.
n1: Hunting Prevention
Use n1 parameters to configure hunting prevention operation.
n1-01 Hunting Prevention Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
n1-02 Hunting Prevention Gain Setting Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Hunting Prevention Time Constant Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
n1-03
Hunting Prevention Gain while in Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
n1-05 Reverse
n2: Speed Feedback Detection Control Function
Use n2 parameters to configure the Speed Feedback Detection Control function operation.
Speed Feedback Detection Control Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
n2-01 (AFR) Gain
n2-02 (AFR) Time Constant
B.1 Parameter Table

n2-03 (AFR) Time Constant 2
n3: High-Slip Braking
Use n3 parameters to configure the high-slip braking function.
High-Slip Braking Deceleration
n3-01 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Frequency Width
n3-02 High-Slip Braking Current Limit Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
High-Slip Braking Dwell Time at
Stop
High-Slip Braking Overload
Time
n3-13 Overexcitation Deceleration Gain Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
High-Slip Suppression Current
Level
Overexcitation Operation
Selection
n6: Online Tuning of Resistance between Motor Lines
Use n6 parameters to adjust the motor line-to-line resistance while the drive is online.
Line-to-Line Motor Resistance
Online Tuning
n8: Permanent Magnet (PM) Motor Control
Use n8 parameters to control the PM motor control.
n8-45 Gain
Pull-In Current Compensation
Time Constant
n8-48 Pull-In Current Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
d-Axis Current for High-
Efficiency Control
n8-51 Acceleration Pull-In Current Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Voltage Error Compensation Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
n8-54 Constant
n8-55 Load Inertia Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
n8-62 Output Voltage Limit Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details. Parameter List
n8-63 Output Voltage Limit Gain 1 Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1018 and later.
n8-65 Gain during ov Suppression Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1011 and later.
n8-68 Output Voltage Limit Gain 2 Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1018 and later.
n8-87 Output Voltage Limit Selection Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1018 and later. B
B.1 Parameter Table

Output Voltage Limit Switching Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
n8-88 Current Level Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1018 and later.
n8-89 Current Hysteresis Width Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1018 and later.
n8-90 Speed Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1018 and later.
Id Limit for Output Voltage Limit Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
n8-91 Control Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1018 and later.
o1: Display Settings
Use o1 parameters to configure the digital operator display.
Drive Mode Unit Monitor
o1-01 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Selection
User Monitor Selection After
Power Up
0: Hz
Digital Operator Display Selection 1: % (100% = E1-04)
o1-03 2: r/min (enter the number of motor poles into E2-04/E4-04/E5-04)
3: User defined by parameters o1-10 and o1-11
o1-05 LCD Contrast Control Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1022 and later.
Frequency Reference Setting and
o1-10 User-Set Display
Frequency Reference Setting /
o1-11 Decimal Display
o2: Multi-Function Selections
Use o2 parameters to configure LED digital operator key functions.
o2-01 LO/RE Key Function Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Enables/Disables the operator panel STOP key when the drive is
operated form external sources (not operator).
o2-02 STOP Key Function Selection 0: Disabled.
1: Enabled
o2-03 User Parameter Default Value Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
o2-04 Drive Model Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Frequency Reference Setting 0: Data/Enter key must be pressed to enter a frequency reference.
o2-05 Method Selection 1: Data/Enter key is not required.
Operation Selection when Digital 0: The drive will continue operation
o2-06 Operator is Disconnected 1: The drive will trigger a fault (oPr) and the motor will coast to stop
Motor Direction at Power Up when Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
o2-07 Using Operator
o2-09 – Factory use
o3: Copy Function
Use o3 parameters to Read, Copy and Verify the parameter settings to and from the drive.
o3-01 Copy Function Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
B.1 Parameter Table

o3-02 Copy Allowed Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
o4: Maintenance Period
Use o4 parameters to perform maintenance.
Accumulated Operation Time Sets the starting value for the cumulative operation time of the drive in
o4-01 Setting units of 10 h.
0: Logs power-on time
Accumulated Operation Time
o4-02 1: Logs operation time when the drive output is active (output operation
Selection time).
Cooling Fan Operation Time
Setting
o4-05 Capacitor Maintenance Setting Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
DC Bus Pre-Charge Relay
Maintenance Setting
o4-09 IGBT Maintenance Setting Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
0: Saves the fault monitor data.
o4-11 U2, U3 Initialization 1: Resets the fault monitor data to 0. (The value of o4-11 is
automatically returned to 0.)
o4-12 kWh Monitor Initialization Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Number of Run commands
Initialize selection
q: DriveWorksEZ Parameters
q1-01 to DriveWorksEZ Parameters Reserved for DriveWorksEZ.
q6-07
r: DriveWorksEZ Connection Parameters
r1-01 to DriveWorksEZ Connection Please refer to the Help file included with the DriveWorksEZ software
r1-40 Parameters 1 to 20 (upper/lower) package for details.
T: Motor Tuning
Enter data into the following parameters to tune the motor and drive for optimal performance.
1: 1st Motor - E1 to E2
T1-00 Motor Selection 1/2 2: 2nd Motor - E3 to E4 (this selection is not displayed if motor 2 has
not been selected)
0: Rotational Auto-Tuning
T1-01 Auto-Tuning Mode Selection 2: Stationary Auto-Tuning
3: Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f control
T1-02 Motor Rated Power Sets the motor rated power in kilowatts (kW).
Parameter List
T1-03 Motor Rated Voltage Sets the motor rated voltage in volts (V).
T1-04 Motor Rated Current Sets the motor rated current in amperes (A).
T1-05 Motor Base Frequency Sets the base frequency of the motor in Hertz (Hz).
T1-06 Number of Motor Poles Sets the number of motor poles.
T1-07 Motor Base Speed Sets the base speed of the motor in revolutions per minute r/min (RPM).
T1-11 Motor Iron Loss Provides the iron loss for determining the Energy Saving coefficient.
B
B.1 Parameter Table

U1: Operation Status Monitors
Use U1 monitors to display the operation status of the drive.
U1-01 Frequency Reference Monitors the frequency reference.
U1-02 Output Frequency Displays the output frequency.
U1-03 Output Current Displays the output current.
U1-04 Control Mode Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Displays the motor speed feedback.
U1-05 Motor Speed Display units are determined by o1-03.
U1-06 Output Voltage Reference Displays the output voltage.
U1-07 DC Bus Voltage Displays the DC bus voltage.
U1-08 Output Power Displays the output voltage (this value is determined internally).
Monitor of internal torque reference value for Open Loop Vector
U1-09 Torque Reference (OLV) control
U1-10 Input Terminal Status Displays the input terminal status.
U1-11 Output Terminal Status Displays the output terminal status.
U1-12 Drive Status Verifies the drive operation status.
Displays the analog input A1 input level.
U1-13 Terminal A1 Input Voltage 100% when the input is 10 V.
Displays the analog input A2 input level.
U1-14 Terminal A2 Input Voltage 100% when the input is 10 V / 20 mA.
U1-16 Output Frequency after Soft Start Displays the output frequency.
U1-18 OPE Fault Parameter Displays the parameter number for oPE or Err (operator error)
where the error occurred.
U1-19 MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Code Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U1-24 Input Pulse Monitor Displays the Pulse Train input RP frequency.
U1-25 Software No. (Flash) Yaskawa Flash ID
U1-26 Software No. (ROM) Yaskawa ROM ID
Displays the numeric code of the remote operator (for use by the
U1-27 Operator Message ID manufacturer).
U1-28 Drive Message ID Displays the numeric code of the drive (for use by the manufacturer).
U2: Fault Trace
Use U2 monitor parameters to view fault trace data.
U2-01 Current Fault Display of the current fault.
U2-02 Previous Fault Display of the previous fault.
Frequency Reference at Previous
U2-03 Displays the frequency reference at the previous fault.
Fault
Output Frequency at Previous
U2-04 Displays the output frequency at the previous fault.
Fault
U2-05 Output Current at Previous Fault Displays the output current at the previous fault.
B.1 Parameter Table

U2-06 Motor Speed at Previous Fault Displays the motor speed at the previous fault.
U2-07 Output Voltage at Previous Fault Displays the output voltage at the previous fault.
DC Bus Voltage at Previous
U2-08 Displays the DC bus voltage at the previous fault.
Fault
U2-09 Output Power at Previous Fault Displays the output power at the previous fault.
Torque Reference at Previous Fault Displays the torque reference at the previous fault.
U2-10
Input Terminal Status at Previous Displays the input terminal status at the previous fault. Displayed as in
U2-11 Fault U1-10.
Output Terminal Status at Previous Displays the output status at the previous fault.
U2-12 Fault
Drive Operation Status at Previous Displays the operation status of drive at the previous fault.
U2-13 Fault
Cumulative Operation Time at
U2-14 Displays the cumulative operation time at the previous fault.
Previous Fault
Soft Starter Speed Reference at Displays the run speed after a soft start when a previous fault occurred.
U2-15 Previous Fault Displayed as in U1-16.
Motor q-Axis Current at Previous Displays q-axis current for the motor at the previous fault.
U2-16 Fault
Motor d-Axis Current at Previous Displays d-axis current for the motor at the previous fault.
U2-17
Fault
U3: Fault History
Use U3 parameters to display fault data.
U3-01 Most Recent Fault Displays the most recent fault.
U3-02 2nd Most Recent Fault Displays the second most recent fault.
U3-03 3rd Most Recent Fault Displays the third most recent fault.
U3-04 4th Most Recent Fault Displays the fourth most recent fault.
U3-05 5th Most Recent Fault Displays the fifth most recent fault.
U3-06 6th Most Recent Fault Displays the sixth most recent fault.
U3-07 7th Most Recent Fault Displays the seventh most recent fault.
U3-08 8th Most Recent Fault Displays the eighth most recent fault.
U3-09 9th Most Recent Fault Displays the ninth most recent fault. Parameter List
U3-10 10th Most Recent Fault Displays the tenth most recent fault.
U3-11 Displays the cumulative operation time at the most recent fault.
Most Recent Fault
Cumulative Operation Time at 2nd Displays the cumulative operation time at the second most recent fault.
U3-12 Most Recent Fault
Cumulative Operation Time at 3rd Displays the cumulative operation time at the third most recent fault.
B
B.1 Parameter Table

Cumulative Operation Time at 4th Displays the cumulative operation time at the fourth most recent fault.
Cumulative Operation Time at 5th Displays the cumulative operation time at the fifth most recent fault.
Cumulative Operation Time at 6th Displays the cumulative operation time at the sixth most recent fault.
Cumulative Operation Time at 7th Displays the cumulative operation time at the seventh most recent fault.
Cumulative Operation Time at 8th Displays the cumulative operation time at the eighth most recent fault.
Cumulative Operation Time at 9th Displays the cumulative operation time at the ninth most recent fault.
U3-20 Displays the cumulative operation time at the tenth most recent fault.
10th Most Recent Fault
U4: Maintenance Monitors
Use U4 parameters to display drive maintenance information.
U4-01 Accumulated Operation Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U4-02 Number of Run Commands Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U4-03 Cooling Fan Operation Time Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U4-05 Capacitor Maintenance Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Soft Charge Bypass Relay
U4-06 Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Maintenance
U4-07 IGBT Maintenance Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U4-08 Heatsink Temperature Note: Available in drive software versions PRG: 1011 and later.
U4-09 LED Check Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U4-10 kWH, Lower 4 Digits
Monitors the drive output power.
U4-11 kWH, Upper 5 Digits
U4-13 Peak Hold Current Displays the peak hold current during run.
U4-14 Peak Hold Output Frequency Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U4-16 Motor Overload Estimate (OL1) 100% = OL1 detection level
Frequency Reference Source
Selection
Frequency Reference from
MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm.
U4-20 Option Frequency Reference Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U4-21 Run Command Source Selection Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications Reference
B.1 Parameter Table

U4-23 Option Card Reference Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U5: PID Monitor
Use U5 parameters to view application-specific settings.
U5-01 PID Feedback Displays the PID feedback value.
U5-02 PID Input Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U5-03 PID Output Displays PID control output.
U5-04 PID Setpoint Displays the PID setpoint.
U5-05 PID differential feedback Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U5-06 PID Adjusted Feedback Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U6: Control Monitor
Use U6 parameters to display drive control information.
U6-01 Motor Secondary Current (Iq) Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U6-02 Motor Excitation Current (ld) Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U6-03 ASR Input Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U6-04 ASR Output Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U6-05 Output voltage reference (Vq) Output voltage reference (Vq). (q-axis)
U6-06 Output Voltage Reference (Vd) Output voltage reference (Vd). (d-axis)
U6-07 q-axis ACR Output Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U6-08 d-Axis ACR Output Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
Frequency Reference Bias (Up/
Down 2)
U6-21 Offset Frequency Refer to V1000 Technical Manual for details.
U6-80 to Option Monitors 1 to 20 Refer to the V1000 Option Technical Manual for details.
U6-99
U8: Custom Monitors for DriveWorksEZ
U8 monitors are reserved for DriveWorksEZ
U8-01 to DWEZ Monitors 1 to 10 Refer to the V1000 Option Technical Manual for details.
U8-10
Note: 1. Cycle power to the drive to enable MEMOBUS/Modbus settings.

2. If using Open Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2), Auto-Tuning will need to be performed again after
the drive is initialized. Refer to Auto-Tuning on page 113 for details. Parameter List
B.1 Parameter Table
Appendix: C
Standards
Compliance
This chapter explains the guidelines and criteria for maintaining
CE and UL standards.
C.1 EUROPEAN STANDARDS...............................210

C.2 UL AND CSA STANDARDS.............................221
C.3 SAFE DISABLE INPUT PRECAUTIONS...........232
C.4 V1000 - ORIENTAÇÃO BÁSICA ......................234
C.1 European Standards
Figure C.1 CE Mark
The CE mark indicates compliance with European safety and environmental regulations and
is required for engaging in business and commerce in Europe.
European standards include the Machinery Directive for machine manufacturers, the Low
Voltage Directive for electronics manufacturers and the EMC guidelines for controlling noise.
This drive displays the CE mark based on the EMC guidelines and the Low Voltage Directive.
• Devices used in combination with this drive must also be CE certified and display the CE
mark. When using drives displaying the CE mark in combination with other devices, it is
ultimately the responsibility of the user to ensure compliance with CE standards. After
setting up the device, verify that conditions meet European standards.
• Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC, 93/68/EEC
u CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance

This drive has been tested according to European standard IEC/EN 61800-5-1, and it fully
complies with the Low Voltage Directive.
To comply with the Low Voltage Directive, be sure to meet the following conditions when
combining this drive with other devices:
n Area of Use
Do not use drives in areas with pollution higher than severity 2 and overvoltage category 3 in
accordance with IEC/EN 664.
n Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection

Yaskawa recommends installing one of the following types of branch circuit protection to
maintain compliance with UL508C. Semiconductor protective type fuses are preferred.
Alternate branch circuit protection devices are also listed in Table C.1.
NOTICE: If a fuse is blown or a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) is tripped, check the wiring and the
selection of peripheral devices to identify the cause. Contact Yaskawa before restarting the drive or the
peripheral devices if the cause cannot be identified.
Table C.1 Factory Recommended Drive Branch Circuit Protection

Fuse Type
Drive Model Manufacturer: Bussmann
Model Fuse Ampere Rating (A)
Single-Phase 200 V Class
BA0001 FWH-25A14F 25
BA0002 FWH-25A14F 25
BA0003 FWH-60B 60
BA0006 FWH-80B 80
BA0010 FWH-100B 100
BA0012 FWH-125B 125
BA0018 FWH-175B 175
Three-Phase 200 V Class
2A0001 FWH-25A14F 25
2A0002 FWH-25A14F 25
2A0004 FWH-25A14F 25
2A0006 FWH-25A14F 25
2A0010 FWH-70B 70
2A0012 FWH-70B 70
2A0020 FWH-90B 90
2A0030 FWH-100B 100
2A0040 FWH-200B 200
2A0056 FWH-200B 200
2A0069 FWH-200B 200
Three-Phase 400 V Class
4A0001 FWH-40B 40
4A0002 FWH-40B 40
4A0004 FWH-50B 50
4A0005 FWH-70B 70
Standards Compliance
4A0007 FWH-70B 70
4A0009 FWH-90B 90
4A0011 FWH-90B 90
4A0018 FWH-80B 80
4A0023 FWH-100B 100
4A0031 FWH-125B 125
4A0038 FWH-200B 200
C
n Grounding
The drive is designed to be used in T-N (grounded neutral point) networks. If installing the
drive in other types of grounded systems, contact your dealer or Yaskawa for instructions.
n CE Standards Compliance for DC Power Supply Input

Install the fuses in the following tables to meet CE standards.
DC power supply
(converter)
Fuse U/ T1
+ +1
_ _ V/ T2 M
W/ T3
Drive
Fuse U/ T1
+1
_ V/ T2 M
W/ T3
Drive
Figure C.2 Example of DC Power Supply Input (Two Drives Connected in Series)
Note: 1. When connecting multiple drives together, make sure that each drive has its own fuse. Replace all
fuses when one fuse blows.
2. Refer to on page 52 for an AC power supply.
3. The recommended fuses and fuse holders are made by Fuji Electric.
Table C.2 Single-Phase 200 V Class Fuses and Fuse Holders

DC Power Supply Input
Fuse Fuse Holder
Drive Model Manufacturer: Fuji Electric
Rated Short
Type Circuit Braking Qty. Type Qty.
Current (kA)
BA0001 CR6L-20/UL CMS-4
BA0006 CR6L-75/UL 100 2 CMS-5 2
Table C.3 Three-Phase 200 V Class Fuses and Fuse Holders

Fuse Fuse Holder
Rated Short
Current (kA)
2A0001 CR6L-20/UL CMS-4
2A0002 CR6L-20/UL CMS-4
2A0004 CR6L-20/UL CMS-4
2A0006 CR6L-30/UL CMS-4
2A0010 CR6L-50/UL CMS-4
2
2A0012 CR6L-50/UL 100 2 CMS-4
2A0020 CR6L-75/UL CMS–5
2A0030 CR6L-100/UL CMS–5
2A0040 CR6L-150/UL CMS–5
2A0056 CR6L-150/UL CMS–5
2A0069 CR6L-200/UL <1> –
<1> Manufacturer does not recommend a specific fuse holder for this fuse. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative for fuse dimensions.
C
Table C.4 Three-Phase 400 V Class Fuses and Fuse Holders

Fuse Fuse Holder
Rated Short
Current (kA)
4A0001 CR6L-20/UL CMS-4
4A0002 CR6L-20/UL CMS-4
4A0004 CR6L-50/UL CMS-4
4A0005 CR6L-50/UL CMS-4
4A0007 CR6L-50/UL CMS-4
4A0009 CR6L-50/UL 100 2 CMS-4 2
4A0011 CR6L-50/UL CMS-4
4A0018 CR6L-50/UL CMS-4
4A0023 CR6L-75/UL CMS–5
4A0031 CR6L-100/UL CMS–5
4A0038 CR6L-150/UL CMS–5
n Guarding Against Harmful Materials

When installing IP20/Open-Chassis enclosure drives, use an enclosure that prevents foreign
material from entering the drive from above or below.
u EMC Guidelines Compliance

This drive is tested according to European standards IEC/EN 61800-3 and it complies with
the EMC guidelines.
n EMC Filter Installation

The following conditions must be met to ensure continued compliance with guidelines. Refer
to EMC Filters on page 217 for EMC filter selection.
Installation Method
Verify the following installation conditions to ensure that other devices and machinery used
in combination with this drive also comply with EMC guidelines.
1. Install an EMC noise filter to the input side specified by Yaskawa for compliance with
European standards.
2. Place the drive and EMC noise filter in the same enclosure.
3. Use braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring or run the wiring through a
metal conduit.
4. Keep wiring as short as possible. Ground the shield on both the drive side and the
motor side.
5. Ground the largest possible surface area of the shield to the metal conduit when using
braided shield cable. Yaskawa recommends using a cable clamp.
C
Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class

L2
L3 L1
PE
PE
B
D C
E
L3 L2 L1
J
E
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
H F
A
G
A –
Ground the cable shield F – Motor cable (braided
B –
Enclosure panel shield cable, max. 20 m)
C –
Metal plate G – Motor
D –
Grounding surface H – Cable clamp
(remove any paint or I – Wiring distance as short
sealant) as possible
E – Drive J – EMC noise filter
Figure C.3 EMC Filter and Drive Installation for CE Compliance
(Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class)
Single-Phase 200 V Class
N
L1
PE PE
B
C
D
N L1
J
E
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
H F
A
G
A –
Ground the cable shield F – Motor cable (braided
B –
Enclosure panel shield cable, max. 20 m)
C –
Metal plate G – Motor
D –
Grounding surface H – Cable clamp Standards Compliance
(remove any paint or I – Wiring distance as short
sealant) as possible
E – Drive J – EMC noise filter
Figure C.4 EMC Filter and Drive Installation for CE Compliance (Single-Phase 200 V
Class)
n EMC Filters
The drive should be installed with the EMC filters listed below in order to comply with the
IEC/EN 61800-3, category C1 requirements.
C
Table C.5 IEC/EN 61800-3 Category C1 Filters

Filter Data (Manufacturer: Schaffner)
Drive Rated Mounting Drive Filter
Current Weight
Model Dimensions
Type Dimensions Mounting Mounting
(lb) [W x L x H] (in)
(A) [Y x X] (in) Screw A Screw
200 V Class Single-Phase
BA0001 FS23638-10-07 10 0.97 2.8 x 6.7 x 1.8 2.0 x 6.1 M4 M5
BA0002 FS23638-10-07 10 0.97 2.8 x 6.7 x 1.8 2.0 x 6.1 M4 M5
BA0003 FS23638-10-07 10 0.97 2.8 x 6.7 x 1.8 2.0 x 6.1 M4 M5
BA0006 FS23638-20-07 20 1.65 4.4 x 6.7 x 2.0 3.6 x 6.1 M4 M5
BA0010 FS23638-20-07 20 1.65 4.4 x 6.7 x 2.0 3.6 x 6.1 M4 M5
BA0012 FS23638-30-07 30 2.42 5.7 x 6.9 x 2.0 4.7 x 6.3 M4 M5
BA0018 FS23638-40-07 40 2.87 6.9 x 6.9 x 2.0 5.9 x 6.3 M4 M5
200 V Three-Phase
2A0001 FS23637-8-07 7.3 0.88 2.8 x 6.7 x 1.6 2.0 x 6.1 M4 M5
2A0002 FS23637-8-07 7.3 0.88 2.8 x 6.7 x 1.6 2.0 x 6.1 M4 M5
2A0004 FS23637-8-07 7.3 0.88 2.8 x 6.7 x 1.6 2.0 x 6.1 M4 M5
2A0006 FS23637-8-07 7.3 0.88 2.8 x 6.7 x 1.6 2.0 x 6.1 M4 M5
2A0010 FS23637-14-07 14 1.28 4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8 3.6 x 6.1 M4 M5
2A0012 FS23637-14-07 14 1.28 4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8 3.6 x 6.1 M4 M5
2A0020 FS23637-24-07 24 1.98 5.7 x 6.9 x 2.0 4.7 x 6.1 M4 M5
2A0030 FS23637-52-07 52 4.41 5.4 x 12.0 x 2.2 3.9 x 11.4 M5 M5
2A0040 FS23637-52-07 52 4.41 5.4 x 12.0 x 2.2 3.9 x 11.4 M5 M5
2A0056 FS23637-68-07 68 5.73 6.9 x 13.4 x 2.6 5.1 x 12.8 M5 M6
2A0069 FS23637-80-07 80 6.83 8.3 x 15.5 x 2.6 6.6 x 14.9 M6 M8
400 V Class Three-Phase
4A0001 FS23639-5-07 5 1.10 4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8 3.6 x 6.1 M4 M5
4A0002 FS23639-5-07 5 1.10 4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8 3.6 x 6.1 M4 M5
4A0004 FS23639-5-07 5 1.10 4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8 3.6 x 6.1 M4 M5
4A0005 FS23639-10-07 10 1.54 4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8 3.6 x 6.1 M4 M5
4A0007 FS23639-10-07 10 1.54 4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8 3.6 x 6.1 M4 M5
4A0009 FS23639-10-07 10 1.54 4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8 3.6 x 6.1 M4 M5
4A0011 FS23639-15-07 15 1.98 5.7 x 6.9 x 2.0 4.7 x 6.3 M4 M5
4A0018 FS23639-30-07 30 4.0 5.4 x 12.0 x 2.2 3.9 x 11.4 M5 M5
4A0023 FS23639-30-07 30 4.0 5.4 x 12.0 x 2.2 3.9 x 11.4 M5 M5
4A0031 FS23639-50-07 50 6.0 6.9 x 13.4 x 2.6 5.1 x 12.8 M5 M6
Filter Data (Manufacturer: Schaffner)

Drive Rated Mounting Drive Filter
Current Weight
Model Dimensions
Type Dimensions Mounting Mounting
(lb) [W x L x H] (in)
(A) [Y x X] (in) Screw A Screw
4A0038 FS23639-50-07 50 6.0 6.9 x 13.4 x 2.6 5.1 x 12.8 M5 M6
Note: EMC filters for models BA0018 and 2A0030 through 2A0069 are in compliance with IEC/EN 61800-3,
Category 2. All other models comply with Category 1.
W
Y H
LINE
X
L
LOAD
A
PE
Figure C.5 EMC Filter Dimensions
n DC Link Chokes for IEC/EN 61000-3-2 Compliance

DC Link Choke
Drive Model
Model Rating
200V Three-Phase Units
2A0004 5.4 A
UZDA-B
2A0006 8 mH
C
DC Link Choke
Drive Model
Model Rating
400 V Three-Phase Units
4A0002 3.2 A
UZDA-B
4A0004 28 mH
Note: Models not listed in the above table do not require a DC link choke for EMC compliance.
C.2 UL and CSA Standards

u UL Standards Compliance
The UL/cUL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada and indicates that UL
has performed product testing and evaluation and determined that their stringent standards for
product safety have been met. For a product to receive UL certification, all components inside
that product must also receive UL certification.
Figure C.6 UL/cUL Mark
This drive is tested in accordance with UL standard UL508C and complies with UL
requirements. The following conditions must be met to maintain compliance when using this
drive in combination with other equipment:
n Installation Area
Do not install the drive to an area greater than pollution severity 2 (UL standard).
n Ambient Temperature
NEMA Type 4X/IP66 enclosure: -10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)
n Main Circuit Terminal Wiring Standards Compliance

Yaskawa recommends using closed-loop crimp terminals on all drive models. UL/cUL
approval requires the use of UL Listed closed-loop crimp terminals when wiring the drive
main circuit terminals. Use only the tools recommended by the terminal manufacturer for
crimping. The wire gauges listed in Table C.6, Table C.7, and Table C.8 are Yaskawa
recommendations. Refer to local codes for proper wire gauge selections.
C
Table C.6 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications

Recomm. Tightening
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 18 to 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 18 to 14
BA0001
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 18 to 14 0.8 to 1.0
BA0002 M3.5 (7.1 to 8.9)
BA0003
B1, B2 – 18 to 14
14 18 to 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
BA0006 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
BA0010 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 2.3 to 2.5
BA0012 M4 (20.4 to 22.1)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 8 12 to 8
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 12 to 8 2.3 to 2.5
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 12 to 8 (20.4 to 22.1)
BA0018 M5
B1, B2 – 12 to 8
2 to 2.5
8 12 to 8 (17.7 to 22.1)

Recomm. Tightening
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 18 to 14
2A0001 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 18 to 14
2A0002 ⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 18 to 14 0.8 to 1.0
M3.5
2A0004 (7.1 to 8.9)
2A0006 B1, B2 – 18 to 14
14 18 to 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
2A0010 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
2A0012 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 14 to 10
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
2A0020 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 8 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 10 to 6 2.1 to 2.3
M4
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 10 to 6 (18.6 to 20.4)
2A0030
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
2 to 2.5
8 <1> 10 to 6 M5 (17.7 to 22.1) Standards Compliance
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 10 to 6 2.1 to 2.3
M4
–, +1, +2 – 10 to 6 (18.6 to 20.4)
2A0040
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
2 to 2.5
6 10 to 6 M5 (17.7 to 22.1)
C
Recomm. Tightening
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 6 to 4
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 6 to 4 5.4 to 6.0
M6 (47.8 to 53.1)
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 6 to 4
2A0056
2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 10 to 6 M5 (23.9 to 26.6)
5.4 to 6.0
6 8 to 4 M6 (47.8 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3 8 to 2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3 8 to 2 9.9 to 11
M8 (87.6 to 97.4)
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 8 to 2
2A0069
2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 8 to 6 M5 (23.9 to 26.6)
5.4 to 6.0
6 6 to 4 M6 (47.8 to 53.1)
<1> When an EMC filter is installed, additional measures must be taken to comply with IEC/EN 61800-5-1. Refer
to EMC Filter Installation on page 214 for details.

Recomm. Tightening
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
4A0001
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
4A0002 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
4A0004
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
14 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
4A0005
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
4A0007 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
4A0009
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
4A0011 M4 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
Recomm. Tightening
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 14 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 14 to 6 2.1 to 2.3
M4
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 14 to 6 (18.6 to 20.4)
4A0018
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
2 to 2.5
8 14 to 6 M5 (17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 10 to 6 2.1 to 2.3
M4
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 10 to 6 (18.6 to 20.4)
4A0023
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
2 to 2.5
8 10 to 6 M5 (17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 8 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 10 to 6 3.6 to 4.0
(31.8 to 35.4)
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 10 to 6 M5
4A0031
2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 14 to 10 (23.9 to 26.6)
5.4 to 6.0
6 <1> 10 to 6 M6 (47.8 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 10 to 6 3.6 to 4.0
(31.8 to 35.4)
⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2 – 10 to 6 M5
4A0038
2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 10 to 8 (23.9 to 26.6)
5.4 to 6.0
6 10 to 6 M6 (47.8 to 53.1)
<1> When an EMC filter is installed, additional measures must be taken to comply with IEC/EN 61800-5-1. Refer
to EMC Filter Installation on page 214 for details.
Note: Use crimp insulated terminals or insulated tubing for wiring these connections. Wires should have a
continuous maximum allowable temperature of 75 °C 600 V UL approved vinyl sheathed insulation. Standards Compliance
Ambient temperature should not exceed 30 °C.
Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Recommendations
Yaskawa recommends crimp terminals made by JST and Tokyo DIP for the insulation cap.
Table C.9 matches the wire gauges and terminal screw sizes with Yaskawa-recommended
crimp terminals, tools, and insulation caps. Refer to the appropriate Wire Gauge and Torque
Specifications table for the wire gauge and screw size for your drive model. Place orders with
a Yaskawa representative or the Yaskawa sales department.
C
The closed-loop crimp terminal sizes and values listed in Table C.9 are Yaskawa
recommendations. Refer to local codes for proper selections.
Table C.9 Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Sizes
Crimp Tool Insulation
Terminal Terminal
Wire Gauge Screws Model Cap Code <1>
Machine No. Die Jaw Model No.
Number
18 AWG M3.5 R1.25-3.5 YA-4 AD-900 TP-003 100-066-217
16 AWG M3.5 R1.25-3.5 YA-4 AD-900 TP-003 100-066-217
M3.5 R2-3.5 YA-4 AD-900 TP-003 100-066-218
14 AWG
M4 R2-4 YA-4 AD-900 TP-003 100-054-028
M4 R5.5-4 YA-4 AD-900 TP-005 100-054-029
12 / 10 AWG
M5 R5.5-5 YA-4 AD-900 TP-005 100-054-030
M4 8-4 YA-4 AD-901 TP-008 100-054-031
8 AWG M5 R8-5 YA-4 AD-901 TP-008 100-054-032
M8 R8-8 YA-4 AD-901 TP-008 100-061-111
M4 14-4 YA-4 AD-902 TP-014 100-66-220
M5 R14-5 YA-4 AD-902 TP-014 100-054-034
6 AWG
M6 R14-6 YA-5 AD-952 TP-014 100-051-261
M8 R14-8 YA-5 AD-952 TP-014 100-054-035
M6 R22-6 YA-5 AD-953 TP-022 100-051-262
4 AWG
M8 R22-8 YA-5 AD-953 TP-022 100-051-263
3 AWG M8 R38-8 YA-5 AD-954 TP-038 100-051-264
2 AWG M8 R38-8 YA-5 AD-954 TP-038 100-051-264
<1> Codes refer to a set of three crimp terminals and three insulation caps. Prepare input and output wiring using
two sets for each connection.
Example: Models with 14 AWG for both input and output require one set for input terminals and one set for
output terminals, so the user should order two sets of [100-066-218].
Note: Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the
voltage drop is greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal
block. Use the following formula to calculate the amount of voltage drop:
Line drop voltage (V) = 3 × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wire length (m) × current (A) × 10-3
n Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection

Yaskawa recommends installing one of the following types of branch circuit protection to
maintain compliance with UL508C. Semiconductor protective type fuses are preferred.
Alternate branch circuit protection devices are also listed in Table C.10.
Branch circuit protection shall be provided by any of the following:
• Non-time delay Class J, T, or CC fuses sized at 300% of the drive input rating
Note: The following model/fuse combinations are excluded from the preceding statement:
2A0002/A6T6, 2A0004/A6T15, 4A0004/A6T15, 4A0005/A6T20, and 4A0007/A6T25.
• Time delay Class J, T, or CC fuses sized at 175% of the drive input rating
• Time-delay Class RK5 fuses sized at 225% of the drive input rating
Table C.10 Factory Recommended Drive Branch Circuit Protection
Non-Time Delay Fuse Type
Class T Fuse Type (Manufacturer:
Fuse Ampere Fuse Ampere
Drive Model (Manufacturer: Ferraz) Bussmann)
Rating (A) Rating (A)
Rated Voltage: Rated Voltage:
600 Vac, 200 kAIR 500 Vac, 200 kAIR
200 V Class Single-Phase Drives
BA0001 A6T6 6 FWH-25A14F 25
BA0002 A6T10 10 FWH-25A14F 25
BA0003 A6T20 20 FWH-60B 60
BA0006 A6T40 40 FWH-80B 80
BA0010 A6T40 40 FWH-100B 100
BA0012 A6T50 50 FWH-125B 125
BA0018 A6T80 80 FWH-175B 175
200 V Class Three-Phase Drives
2A0001 A6T3 3 FWH-25A14F 25
2A0002 A6T6 6 FWH-25A14F 25
2A0004 A6T15 15 FWH-25A14F 25
2A0006 A6T20 20 FWH-25A14F 25
2A0010 A6T25 25 FWH-70B 70
2A0012 A6T25 25 FWH-70B 70
2A0020 A6T40 40 FWH-90B 90
2A0030 – – FWH-100B 100
2A0040 – – FWH-200B 200
2A0056 – – FWH-200B 200
2A0069 – – FWH-200B 200
400 V Class Three-Phase Drives
4A0001 A6T3 3 FWH-40B 40
4A0002 A6T6 6 FWH-40B 40
4A0004 A6T15 15 FWH-50B 50
4A0005 A6T20 20 FWH-70B 70
4A0007 A6T25 25 FWH-70B 70
4A0009 A6T25 25 FWH-90B 90
4A0011 A6T30 30 FWH-90B 90
4A0018 – – FWH-80B 80
C
Non-Time Delay Fuse Type

Class T Fuse Type (Manufacturer:
Fuse Ampere Fuse Ampere
Drive Model (Manufacturer: Ferraz) Bussmann)
Rating (A) Rating (A)
Rated Voltage: Rated Voltage:
600 Vac, 200 kAIR 500 Vac, 200 kAIR
4A0023 – – FWH-100B 100
4A0031 – – FWH-125B 125
4A0038 – – FWH-200B 200
n Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals

Wire low voltage wires with NEC Class 1 circuit conductors. Refer to national state or local
codes for wiring. The external power supply shall be a UL-Listed Class 2 power source or
equivalent.
Table C.11 Control Circuit Terminal Power Supply
Input / Output Terminal Signal Power Supply Specifications
Multi-function photocoupler P1, P2, PC Requires class 2 power supply
output
Use the internal power supply of the drive.
Multi-function digital inputs S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, SC Use class 2 for external power supply.
Use the internal power supply of the drive.
Multi-function analog inputs A1, A2, AC Use class 2 for external power supply.
Use the internal LVLC power supply of the
Pulse train input RP drive. Use class 2 for external power supply.
Use the internal LVLC power supply of the
Pulse train output MP drive. Use class 2 for external power supply.
n Drive Short-Circuit Rating

This drive has undergone the UL short-circuit test, which certifies that during a short circuit
in the power supply the current flow will not rise above 31,000 amps maximum at 240 V for
200 V class drives and 480 V for 400 V class drives.
• The MCCB and breaker protection and fuse ratings shall be equal to or greater than the
short-circuit tolerance of the power supply being used.
• Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 31,000 RMS symmetrical
amperes for 240 V in 200 V class drives (up to 480 V for 400 V class drives) motor overload
protection.
u CSA Standards Compliance
Figure C.7 CSA Mark
n CSA for Industrial Control Equipment

The drive is CSA-certified as Industrial Control Equipment Class 3211.
Specifically, the drive is certified to: CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 04-04 and CAN/CSA C22.2 No.
14-05.
u Drive Motor Overload Protection

Set parameter E2-01 (motor rated current) to the appropriate value to enable motor overload
protection. The internal motor overload protection is UL listed and in accordance with the
NEC and CEC.
n E2-01: Motor Rated Current

Setting Range: Model Dependent
Default Setting: Model Dependent
Parameter E2-01 (motor rated current) protects the motor if parameter L1-01 is not set to 0
(default is 1, standard induction motor protection enabled).
If Auto-Tuning has been performed successfully, the motor data that was entered in T1-04 is
automatically written into parameter E2-01. If Auto-Tuning has not been performed, manually Standards Compliance
enter the correct motor rated current in parameter E2-01.
n L1-01: Motor Overload Protection Selection

The drive has an electronic overload protection function (oL1) based on time, output current
and output frequency, which protects the motor from overheating. The electronic thermal
overload function is UL-recognized, so it does not require an external thermal overload relay
for single motor operation.
This parameter selects the motor overload curve used according to the type of motor applied.
C
Table C.12 Overload Protection Settings

Setting Description
0 Disabled
1 Standard Fan-Cooled Motor (Default)
2 Drive Duty Motor with a Speed Range of 1:10
3 Vector Motor with a Speed Range of 1:100
4 Permanent Magnet Motor with Variable Torque
6 Standard Fan-Cooled Motor (50 Hz)
Disable the electronic overload protection (L1-01 = 0: Disabled) and wire each motor with its
own motor thermal overload when connecting the drive to more than one motor for
simultaneous operation.
Enable the motor overload protection (L1-01 = “1”, “2”, or “3”) when connecting the drive
to a single motor unless there is another means of preventing motor thermal overload. The
electronic thermal overload function causes an oL1 fault, which shuts off the output of the
drive and prevents additional overheating of the motor. The motor temperature is continually
calculated as long as the drive is powered up.
n L1-02: Motor Overload Protection Time

Setting Range: 0.1 to 5.0 Minutes
Factory Default: 1.0 Minutes
The L1-02 parameter sets the allowed operation time before the oL1 fault occurs when the
drive is running at 60 Hz and 150% of the full load amp rating (E2-01) of the motor. Adjusting
the value of L1-02 can shift the set of oL1 curves up the Y-axis of the diagram below but will
not change the shape of the curves.
Operation time (minutes)
10
7
3 Cold start
(characteristics when an
overload occurs at a
1 complete stop)
Hot start
0.4 (characteristics when an
overload occurs during
continuous operation at 100%)
0.1
Motor current (%)
0 100 150 200 E2-01 = 100% motor current
Figure C.8 Motor Overload Protection Time
C
C.3 Safe Disable Input Precautions
u Safe Disable Function Description

The Safe Disable function can be utilized to perform a safe stop according to the IEC/EN
61800-5-2, stop category 0 (Uncontrolled stop by power removal). It is designed to meet the
requirements of the ISO/EN 13849-1, Safety Category 3, PL d, and IEC/EN 61508, SIL2.
Removing the voltage from terminal H1 disables the drive output, i.e. the power supply to the
motor is cut by stopping the switching of the output transistors in a safe way. “Hbb” is shown
on the display. Safe Disable is applicable for induction and permanent magnet motors.
u Installation
If the Safe Disable function is utilized, the wire link between the terminals HC and H1 that is
installed at shipment must be removed entirely.
Connect the drive to an ISO/EN 13849-1, Safety Category 3 interrupting device so that in case
of a Safe Disable request the connection between the terminals HC and H1 is opened.
Power Supply
Drive
ISO/EN 13849-1 Safety
Cat, 3 Device
HC Controller
H1
Figure C.9 Safe Disable Wiring Example
n Installation Precautions
• To ensure the Safe Disable function appropriately fulfills the safety requirements of the
application, a thorough risk assessment for the safety system must be carried out.
• The drive must be installed in an enclosure with a protection degree of at least IP54 in order
to maintain ISO/EN 13849-1, safety category 3 compliance.
• If the safety device and the drive are installed in separate cabinets, install the Safe Disable
wires in a manner preventing short circuits.
• The Safe Disable function does not cut the power supply to the drive and does not provide
electrical isolation. Before any installation or maintenance work is done, the power supply
of the drive must be switched off.
• Consider the following when using PM motors: When the Safe Disable function is active,
a failure in two of the drive power devices can occur and current will continue to flow
through the motor winding. This failure will not produce torque in an induction motor,
however, when occurring in a PM motor, torque will be produced and cause an alignment
of the rotor magnets, which may cause the rotor to turn up to 180 degrees electrically. Ensure
that this possible failure mode is not safety-critical for the application.
• The wiring distance for the Safe Disable inputs should not exceed 30 m.
• The time from opening the Safe Disable input until the drive output is switched off is less
than 1 ms.
C
C.4 V1000 - ORIENTAÇÃO BÁSICA

PORTUGUÊS
u INVERSORES - V1000 TERMO DE GARANTIA

O manual do V1000 em português encontra-se no CD fornecido junto com o inversor
n Limites da Garantia
Os produtos fabricados pela YASKAWA são garantidos contra defeitos de fabricação pelo
período de 12 (doze) meses da data de entrega do equipamento. A comprovação da
aplicabilidade da garantia é feita através da nota fiscal de compra.
A garantia é FOB YASKAWA BRASIL não incluído custos de transporte e frete.
Os produtos com defeitos de fabricação serão reparados ou trocados por novos, a critério da
YASKAWA, sem nenhum ônus ao cliente. Caberá a YASKAWA a definição da aplicação ou
não da garantia. A obrigação da companhia restringe-se ao reparo ou troca de produtos
defeituosos, não cobrindo em hipótese alguma custos adicionais decorrentes do não
funcionamento dos equipamentos. A YASKAWA não assumirá responsabilidade por reparos
em produtos e/ou equipamentos realizados por empresas não autorizadas. A vida dos produtos
da companhia dependerá de seu uso e instalação corretas, dentro dos limites especificados.
Produtos que sofrerem danos por instalação inadequada, por tensões impróprias e/ou
interligações ou fiação incorretas, não serão cobertos pela garantia. A garantia Yaskawa não
cobrirá danos causados por elementos naturais como raios, terremotos, avalanches,
inundações e qualquer outro tipo de efeito causado pela natureza.
n Solicitação de Reparo em Garantia

Junto ao equipamento deverá ser enviado um relatório descrevendo o defeito e/ ou reclamação
assim como descrição da aplicação e do motor utilizado. Solicite o formulário "solicitação de
reparo em garantia" ao nosso departamento técnico.
n Garantia a Terceiros
A garantia é direito do primeiro comprador e deverá ser solicitada pelo mesmo.
u INVERSORES DE FREQUÊNCIA - V1000

n ORIENTAÇÃO BÁSICA
Instalação
Para o perfeito funcionamento e garantia de durabilidade, os inversores devem ser instalados
em local abrigado e livre de altas temperaturas, chuva, umidade, óleo em suspensão,
atmosferas salinas, exposição direta ao sol, gases ou líquidos corrosivos, poeira, partículas
metálicas em suspensão e vibrações excessivas.A temperatura ambiente máxima

recomendada é de 40°C. Ao se instalar o inversor em locais fechados recomenda-se prever
ventilação forçada adequada de forma a não permitir que a temperatura interna exceda a 50°C.
Cuidados de Interligação
Conecte a alimentação nos terminais R/L1, S/L2 e T/L3 e o motor nos terminais U/T1, V/T2
e W/T3.Para operação com alimentação monofásica, conecte a alimentação aos terminais R/
L1 e S/L2. Não utilize o T/L3.
Para perfeito funcionamento do inversor siga as seguintes recomendações:
• O motor deve ser conectado aos terminais U, V e W.
• Nunca conecte a alimentação aos terminais de saída, isso irá danificar o inversor.
• Se a distância entre o motor e o inversor for longa, reduza a freqüência da portadora, C6-02.
• A fiação de controle deve ter distância máxima de 50 m. Caso necessário distâncias maiores
utilize relés para chaveamento dos comandos. Use cabos blindados instalados separados da
fiação de força.
• Certifique-se que os terminais estejam apertados. Não conecte ou desconecte a fiação com
o inversor energizado.
• Conecte o terminal de terra dos inversores a um ponto central, individualmente, evitando-
se a formação de loops.
• Utilize cabos e terminais de pressão apropriados de forma a não existir mau contato na barra
de terminais.
Table C.13 INDICAÇÃO DE FALHAS *
Operador Descrição da Falha
Digital
bus Erro de cartão de comunicação
BB Supressão de Pulsos (Base Block Externo)
CE Erro de comunicação Memobus/Modbus
CF / CPFxx Falhas no cartão de controle
dEu Desvio de velocidade
dWAL Erro de saída programa DriveWorksEZ
dWFL Falha DriveWorksEZ
EF Erro de Sequenciamento: Comando Rodar Avante e Reverso Acionados Juntos.
EFx Falha Externa
* Para informações mais detalhadas das falhas e alarmes, consultar o manual de programação e
manutenção.
C
Operador
Digital Descrição da Falha
FAN Falha no Ventilador

FbH/FbL Realimentação PID excessiva ou Perdida
GF Fuga a Terra
LF / LF2 Perca de Fase na Saída/Desbalanceamento
oC Sobrecorrente
oFAxx Falha no cartão opcional
oH/oH1 Falha de Sobretemperatura no dissipador
oH3/oH4 Sobretemperatura: no motor (entrada PTC)
oL1 Sobrecarga do Motor
oL2 Sobrecarga do Inversor
oL3/4/7 Detecção Sobretorque
oPx Erro de Programação
oS Sobrevelocidade
oV Sobretensão: Tensão Link CC Elevada
PF Perca de Fase na Entrada
PGo Encoder desconectado
rH Sobretemperatura no Resistor de Frenagem
rr Falha no transistor de frenagem
SER Erro de Sequenciamento
Ser Número de religações excedido
uV Subtensão: Tensão de Entrada Baixa
UV1 Subtensão
UV2 Subtensão no Controle
* Para informações mais detalhadas das falhas e alarmes, consultar o manual de programação e
manutenção.
Os terminais +1, +2, - ,B1 e B2

São destinados a conexão de opcionais.
Nunca interligue os mesmos a rede Resistor de Frenagem
de alimentação. (opcionais) Motor
Jumper
Ventilador
Para alimentação em
200V monofásico,
+2 +1 - B1 B2
Utilizar R/L1 e R/L2. M
DJ MC
R/L1
V1000
Alimentação R/L1
Trifásica U/T1
S/L2 S/L2
200 a 240V V/T2 M
T/L3 T/L3
W/T3
Rodar Avante S1
Rodar Reverso S2 Conector para

Entradas Digitais Cartões
Multifunção opcionais
Falha Externa S3
(default) Saída Digital
Reset S4 Chave S1 Programável rele
V I 250 Vca, 10 mA a 1 A
30 Vcc, 10 mA a 1 A
Multivelocidade 1 S5 (default)
Multivelocidade 2 S6
MA Falha Saídas Digitais
Jog S7 Programáveis
fotoacoplador
+24 V 8 mA MB
24 V 5 ~ 48 Vcc
2 to 50 mA
Sink MC (default)
Chave S3
Source
SC
P1 Rodando
Terra para malha 0 V (fotoacoplador 1)
do cabo
Freqüência
P2 Concordante
Entrada Trem (fotoacoplador 2)
RP de pulsos Comum dos
(max. 32 kHz) PC
foto-acopladores
+V Alimentação
2k +10.5 max. 20 mA
Entradas de MP Saída a Trem de Pulsos
Referência A1 0 to +10 V (20 k ) 0 to 32 kHz
multifuncionais A2 0 to +10 V (20 k ) Saída Analogica
AM
e programaveis (0)4 to 20 mA (250 ) +
AM
AC 0 to +10 Vcc
AC - (2 mA)
Resistor de Comm.
Chave Monitor
terminação connector
Chave de S2 Saída
120 , 1/2 W
Segurança R+
Entrada HC
de Segurança R-
Jumper
Comunicação
H1 S+ MEMOBUS/Modbus Standards Compliance
S- RS-485/422
IG
Terra para malha do cabo
shielded line Par tranqado blindade

Principal terminal ciquito Terminal controle
Figure C.10 Diagrama de Interligacoes
C
Entradas Digitais Saídas Digitais Entrada Analógica Saída Analógica

Multifunção: Multifunção: Multifunção: Multifunção:
S1: H1-01 MA: H2-01 A1: H3-02 AM: H4-02
S2: H1-02 P1 : H2-02 A2: H3-10 -
S3: H1-03 P2 : H2-03 - -
S4: H1-04 - - -
S5: H1-05 - - -
S6: H1-06 - - -
S7: H1-07 - - -
Yaskawa Brasil acredita no

Yaskawa Eletrico do Brasil Ltda Fone: (0xx11) 3585-1100 desenvolvimento sustentavel do pais e
Av. Fagundes Filho, 620 Fax : (0xx11) 5581-8795 colabora evitando desperdicio de
Bairro Saude E-mail : yaskawa@yaskawa.com.br papel.
Sao Paulo - SP Site : www.yaskawa.com.br Faca o download do manual Completo
em nosso site:
Revision History
The revision dates and the numbers of the revised manuals appear on the bottom of the back cover.
Revision
Date of Publication Section Revised Content
Number
December 2014 1 -1 Chapter 1 Revision: Model number definition
Revision: Reviewed and corrected documentation

All Revision: Upgraded the software version from PRG:
1021 to PRG: 1023
Chapter 3 Revision: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications
Appendix Revision: Standards
A
March 2014 1
Addition: Fuse List for European Standards
Appendix Revision: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications for
C UL Standards
Revision: Standards
Back Revision: Address
Cover
May 2012 – – First Edition.
YASKAWA AC Drive-V1000
Compact Vector Control Drive
Quick Start Guide
YASKAWA AMERICA, INC.

2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292) or 1-847-887-7000 Fax: 1-847-887-7310
http://www.yaskawa.com
DRIVE CENTER (INVERTER PLANT)

2-13-1, Nishimiyaichi, Yukuhashi, Fukuoka, 824-8511, Japan
Phone: 81-930-25-3844 Fax: 81-930-25-4369
http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-6891, Japan
Phone: 81-3-5402-4502 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580
http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELÉTRICO DO BRASIL LTDA.

Avenida Piraporinha 777, Diadema, São Paulo, 09950-000, Brasil
Phone: 55-11-3585-1100 Fax: 55-11-3585-1187
http://www.yaskawa.com.br
YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH

Hauptstrasse 185, 65760 Eschborn, Germany
Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-569-398
http://www.yaskawa.eu.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION

9F, Kyobo Securities Bldg., 26-4, Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, 150-737, Korea
Phone: 82-2-784-7844 Fax: 82-2-784-8495
http://www.yaskawa.co.kr
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.

151 Lorong Chuan, #04-02A, New Tech Park, 556741, Singapore
Phone: 65-6282-3003 Fax: 65-6289-3003
http://www.yaskawa.com.sg
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (CHINA) CO., LTD.

12F, Carlton Bld., No.21 HuangHe Road, HuangPu District, Shanghai 200003, China
Phone: 86-21-5385-2200 Fax: 86-21-5385-3299
http://www.yaskawa.com.cn
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (CHINA) CO., LTD. BEIJING OFFICE

Room 1011, Tower W3 Oriental Plaza, No. 1 East Chang An Ave.,
Dong Cheng District, Beijing, 100738, China
Phone: 86-10-8518-4086 Fax: 86-10-8518-4082
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION

9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei, 104, Taiwan
Phone: 886-2-2502-5003 Fax: 886-2-2505-1280
YASKAWA INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED

#17/A Electronics City, Hosur Road Bangalore 560 100 (Karnataka), India
Phone: 91-80-4244-1900 Fax: 91-80-4244-1901
http://www.yaskawaindia.in
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture
thereof, the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations. Therefore, be
sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that m ay apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
© 2012-2014 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
MANUAL NO. TOEP C710606 47B

Published in U.S.A. December 2014 12-5 1 -1
13-7-12_YAI

Yaskawa V1000 Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Yaskawa V1000 Series

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Yaskawa V1000 Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

YASKAWA AC Drive-V1000

Compact Vector Control Drive

MANUAL NO. TOEP C710606 47B

IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure ............................................... 34

2. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION .................................. 39

4. START-UP PROGRAMMING & OPERATION ............ 81

Keys, Displays, and LEDs..................................................... 82

Before Auto-Tuning the Drive .............................................. 113

5. TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................... 129

B. PARAMETER LIST .................................................... 173

C. STANDARDS COMPLIANCE .................................... 209

This Page Intentionally Blank

u Terms and Abbreviations

i.2 General Safety

u Supplemental Safety Information

u Drive Label Warnings

WARNING Risk of electric shock.

Figure i.1 Warning Information

Figure i.2 Warning Information Position

i.3 Application Precautions

u General Application Precautions

4000 Power supply harmonics

Figure i.3 Installing a Reactor

n Selecting a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or Ground Fault

n Magnetic Contactor (MC) Installation

n Inspection and Maintenance

n Transporting the Drive

u Notes on Motor Operation

n Using a Standard Motor

Figure i.4 Allowable Load Characteristics for a Yaskawa Motor

n Using a Synchronous Motor

n Applications with Specialized Motors

n Power Driven Machinery (decelerators, belts, chains, etc.)

This Page Intentionally Blank

1.1 MODEL NUMBER AND NAMEPLATE CHECK. . .28

1.1 Model Number and Nameplate Check

FILE NO : E131457 IP20

A – Normal Duty Amps / F – Serial number

Figure 1.1 Nameplate Information Example

No. Voltage Class F IP20/NEMA Type 1 Environmental

Refer to the tables below.

<1> Refer to manual TOBPC71060635 for more information on these models.

Note: Model BA0018 is available with a Heavy Duty rating only.

1.2 Component Names

n Single-Phase AC 200 V BA0001B to BA0003B

n Single-Phase AC 200 V BA0006B to BA0018B

n Three-Phase AC 200 V 2A0030A to 2A0069A

u IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure

n Single-Phase AC 200 V BA0001F to BA0003F

A – Fan cover <1> I – Front cover screws

n Single-Phase AC 200 V BA0006F to BA0018F

n Three-Phase AC 200 V 2A0030F to 2A0069F

This Page Intentionally Blank

2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION..........................40

2.1 Mechanical Installation

u Installation Orientation and Spacing

A – 30 mm minimum C – 100 mm minimum

n Multiple Drive Installation

A – Line up the tops of the C – 100 mm minimum